JP6898075B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to the control of a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a program of a main control control board is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-109892

However, it is desired to further reduce the capacity of the program in the control device of the above-mentioned prior art gaming machine.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of reducing the capacity of a program of a control device.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means is provided with a control device for controlling the game, and the control device should launch a gaming ball into the first gaming area according to the progress of the game, or the first game. A launch position designation flag setting means that determines whether to launch a game ball in a second game area different from the region and sets the determination content in the launch position designation flag, and launches without changing the value of the launch position designation flag. It is a gaming machine including a launch position designation information transmitting means that stores the launch position designation information in the position designation information and transmits the launch position designation information to a control device different from the control device.

In this solution, the game proceeds according to the following flow.
(1) The control device controls the game. The control device is a device that plays a central role in the control operation, and controls the operation of the entire gaming machine in an integrated manner.

(2) The control device of (1) above should launch a game ball into the first game area (left-handed area) according to the progress of the game, or the second game area (right-handed) different from the first game area. Determine whether to launch the game ball in the area), and set the content of the decision in the launch position specification flag. For example, when it is decided that the game ball should be fired in the first game area, "00H" is set in the launch position designation flag, and when it is decided that the game ball should be fired in the second game area. Set the launch position designation flag to "20H".

(3) The control device of (1) above stores the launch position designation information (launch position designation command) without changing the value of the launch position designation flag of (2) above, and stores the launch position designation information in the control device ( For example, transmission is performed to a control device (for example, an effect control device) different from the main control device).

As described above, according to the present solution, the control device stores the value of the launch position designation flag in the launch position designation information without changing the value, and transmits the launch position designation information to another control device. Compared with the conventional method of changing the value of the position designation flag and then storing it in the launch position designation information, the process of generating the launch position designation information can be simplified, and as a result, the capacity of the control device is reduced. can do.

Solution 2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution causes the control device to place a gaming ball in the second gaming area when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value. When the launch position designation display means for displaying the mode indicating that the ball should be fired is provided and the launch position designation flag setting means determines that the gaming ball should be fired in the second gaming area, the launch position The gaming machine is characterized in that a value for specifying the launch position designation display means is set in the designation flag.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of the present solution.
(1) When the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), the control device displays a mode indicating that the game ball should be launched in the second game area (lighting display). A display means (launch position designation lamp LED) is provided.

(2) When the launch position designation flag setting means determines that the game ball should be launched in the second game area, the above-mentioned is selected from all the display means including the other display means in the launch position designation flag. A value for specifying the launch position designation display means (value for specifying the launch position designation lamp LED (20H)) of (1) is set. That is, "20H" is a value that depends on the hardware configuration for identifying the firing position designation lamp LED.

As described above, according to the present solution, when it is determined that the game ball should be launched in the second game area, the value for specifying the launch position designation display means (launch position designation) is set in the launch position designation flag. Since the value (20H) for specifying the lamp LED) is set, the value for specifying the launch position designation display means can be used as it is for the launch position designation information, and the control process is simplified by unifying the set values. The capacity of the control device can be reduced.

Solution 3: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution means that the launch position designation information transmitting means is said when the power of the control device is turned on or when the value of the launch position designation flag changes. It is a gaming machine characterized by transmitting launch position designation information.

According to this solution, since the launch position designation information is transmitted when the power of the control device is turned on or the value of the launch position designation flag changes, it is only possible to realize the transmission of the minimum necessary launch position designation information. As a result, the capacity of the control device can be reduced by simplifying the control process at the time of transmission.

According to the present invention, the capacity of the program of the control device can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the subcommand set processing at power-on (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the subcommand set processing at power-on (2/2). It is a figure which shows the program of the subcommand set processing at the time of power-on of an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of the subcommand set processing at power-on. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the launch position designation flag and the launch position designation command of an embodiment and a comparative example. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening excess prize monitoring processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening excess prize monitoring processing (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the byte counter subtraction selection process. It is a figure which shows a part of the program of the large prize opening excess prize monitoring processing. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of a byte counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of a byte counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of the byte counter subtraction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the special game management process. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the setting contents such as the opening time of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during special symbol stop display (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during special symbol stop display (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of byte data selection processing. It is a figure which shows a part of the program of the special symbol stop display processing. It is a figure which shows the data table of the maximum operation times of a special electric accessory. It is a figure which shows the special electric accessory designation data table. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of byte data selection processing. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of byte data selection processing. It is a figure which shows the program (comparison example) of byte data selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a word data selection process. It is a figure which shows the program of the opening time setting processing. It is a figure which shows the opening time data 1 table. It is a figure which shows the program (the embodiment) of byte data selection processing. It is a figure which shows the program (comparison example) of a word data selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big hit start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of ordinary symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of ordinary symbol hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a double byte selection process. It is a figure which shows the program of the normal symbol hit determination processing. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol low probability hourly hit determination table and the ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol hit determination selection table. It is a figure which shows the program (the embodiment) of a double byte selection process. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the ordinary symbol hit determination selection table, the ordinary symbol low probability hourly hit determination table, and the ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a double byte selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the winning frequency abnormality error determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the word counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the program of the winning frequency abnormality error determination processing. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of the word counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of the word counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the value of RWM and a flag at the time of calling a word counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of the byte counter subtraction processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the winning is obtained by the 1st special symbol lottery in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow which develops when the winning is obtained by the 2nd special symbol lottery in a fireworks rush or a coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect (super reach effect) executed at the time of a big hit (winning). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is being played. It is possible to generate some kind of production (notice production, probabilistic promotion production, promotion production during a major role, etc.).

Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown) that constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, a connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the advantageous game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The game ball is guided to the second game area by the distribution area 19e (launch rail, ceiling portion of the game area, guidance portion, etc.) related to the route to be distributed to the second game area. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, and a first variable winning device 30 (variable ball winning device,) are placed around the effect unit 40. The lower special electric accessory), the second variable winning device 31 (variable ball entry device, upper special electric accessory), the distribution unit 200, and the like are distributed and installed. The start gate 20 causes a lottery opportunity of an operation lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) by passing a game ball guided from the distribution area to the right-handed area as a main target.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, the distribution unit 200, the normal winning opening 24, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the distribution unit 200 is arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 is arranged downstream of the distribution unit 200. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the ordinary winning opening 24 on the right side is a position where a game ball passing through the route on the left side of the distribution unit 200 can enter. Is located in.

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and a ball entry port 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the obstacle nails. The entry port 19a and the discharge port 19b are connected by a connecting passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the ball entry port 19a is decelerated and rectified through this connecting passage, and is discharged from the discharge port 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined ball entry port) is arranged on the right side of the starting gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but when it is flipped to the right by an obstacle nail, it enters the out port 19c.

At the top of the game area, an entrance area (for example, a row of passages formed in the upper part of the effect unit 40) for guiding the moving direction of the game ball launched toward the upper part of the game area to the right-handed area can be regulated. A distribution region 19e is formed based on a compartment having an inlet) and an outlet region (eg, outlet 19b).

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation.

Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a enters the ball entry port 19a and is discharged from the discharge port 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the out port 19c. There is a possibility of entering the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, and then entering the distribution unit 200.

The game ball distributed to the route on the left side by the distribution unit 200 may enter the normal winning opening 24 or the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. Further, the game ball distributed to the right route by the distribution unit 200 may enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 and the out port 19c is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and accordingly. It enables the ball to enter the right-starting winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with an opening / closing member 28b that is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in an upright state (retract position), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a state (driving position) in which the opening / closing member 28b is tilted toward the front side, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a. The variable start winning device 28 is a tongue piece type device that opens the right starting winning opening by moving from the position where the opening / closing member is retracted from the board surface to the position where it protrudes toward the front side from the board surface. You may. Further, the variable start winning device 28 may be a so-called tulip type device.

The first variable winning device 30 described above is a predetermined first condition (for example, a 16-round probability variation symbol 1) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit or small hit mode). It operates when the condition that the winning symbol other than the winning symbol is won, the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (upper large winning opening). (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is a case where the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode) as in the case of the first variable winning device 30, and is a predetermined second condition (for example,). It operates when the winning symbol of the 16th round probability variation symbol 1 is satisfied), and enables the ball to enter the 2nd big winning opening 31b (lower big winning opening) (special electric accessory, 1st). 2 Special entry event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged upstream of the distribution unit 200 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is impossible to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 in the downstream direction is arranged. The guidance passage 31c extends downward and to the left from the entrance of the second large winning opening 31b.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guidance passage 31c, and a discharge port 31f is arranged downstream of the guidance passage 31c.

The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85, and is guided to the discharge port 31f through the guidance passage 31c.

[Distribution unit (distribution device)]
A distribution unit 200 is arranged between the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Among the right-handed game balls, the game balls that have not entered the out port 19c, the variable start winning device 28, and the second variable winning device 31 enter the distribution unit 200.

The distribution unit 200 has an inflow portion 200i into which the game ball guided to the right-handed region via the distribution region 19e flows in, and the game ball flowing into the inflow portion 200i is an electric or mechanical distribution unit. The first discharge port 200o1 (first discharge portion) or the second right-handed region that discharges toward the first location (lower left side of the distribution unit 200) of the right-handed region at a distribution ratio predetermined by 202. It is a unit that distributes to any of the second discharge ports 200o2 (second discharge unit) that discharges toward a place (lower right side of the distribution unit 200). When the electric distribution body 202 is adopted, a distribution body that always operates in a constant operation pattern from the time when the power is turned on can be used, and when the mechanical distribution body 202 is adopted, a plurality of peripheral surfaces are used. A rotating body that has and rotates in the vertical direction can be used.

The distribution ratio of the distribution unit 200 can be arbitrarily set, such as an equal ratio or an unequal ratio. In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio of the distribution unit 200 is set to a ratio of 1: 3. Therefore, assuming that four game balls enter the distribution unit 200, three of them are distributed to the right route, and the remaining one game ball is distributed to the left route. Be done. Therefore, when the game ball enters the distribution unit 200, one out of every four balls will enter the normal winning opening 24.

A normal winning port 24 is arranged below the first discharge port 200o1 (lower left side of the distribution unit 200).
Further, the above-mentioned first variable winning device 30 is arranged downstream of the second discharge port 200o2 (lower right side of the distribution unit 200).

The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decoration imitating a plant) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction.

Further, an inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and a game ball can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by bending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bending toward the front side in an L shape, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is open toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start winning opening 26. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from the rolling stage 40e is discharged from the ball discharge port 40h, and easily enters the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball discharge port 40h.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game area includes the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the game ball that has entered the out opening 19c. All the game balls driven into 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the normal symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are 0 to 4 each depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the reduced one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a1, 38a2, 38a3, 38a4, 38a5, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. It has been. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer, control device) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly functions to control the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Have. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81 (detection means). Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 are It is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, in the game board unit 8, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, and the first large winning opening solenoid 90 correspond to each of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31. Two major winning opening solenoids 97 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, and 97 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close (operate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let me. The solenoids 88, 90, and 97 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (payout means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor, a payout means) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and a drive circuit of the payout motor 102 is mounted on the payout device board 100. It is provided. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When each prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The processing is performed so that the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include the decorative / directing board surface lamps 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. To. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass frame illumination board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted, together with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. As described above, the control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56, and also includes the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is displayed. Drive individually.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously saved RAM clear switch, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched on). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all areas of the RAM 76 work area (user work area including the prohibited area and the stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, and an operation memory number) to the effect control device 124. Decrease production command, count cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, special figure 1 hold specification command, special figure 2 hold specification command, launch position specification command, power-on special phase specification command, customer waiting specification command, etc. ) Is sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, right-handed suggestion effect, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting. The commands include, for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, a special symbol destination judgment effect command, an operation memory increase effect command, an operation memory decrease effect command, a count cut counter remaining number command, and a special game state. There are a designation command, a special figure 1 hold designation command, a special figure 2 hold designation command, a launch position designation command, a special phase designation command at power-on, a customer waiting designation command, and the like. The effect control device 124 that has received the launch position designation command can execute the left-handed suggestion effect or the right-handed suggestion effect based on the content of the launch position designation command.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts and then executes a power failure check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 backs up the work area of the RAM 76 when the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, etc. is cleared. Back up the entire contents except the valid judgment flag and the sum check buffer, and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops processing (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 14), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 14), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 14). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically showing a procedure example of the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above-mentioned check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 has an output port corresponding to a test signal terminal and a command control signal in addition to an output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97. Clear the buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processing in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Subcommand set processing when power is turned on]
9 and 10 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the subcommand set process at power-on. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

The power-on subcommand set process is a process called in the effect control return process (S111 in FIG. 6) or the effect control output process (S115 in FIG. 6).

Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes the model command setting process. If game machines with different specifications exist as a series, the content of the production can be different depending on the model command.

Step S302: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter (first special symbol operation storage number counter).

Step S304: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 1 hold designation command).

Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the subcommand set process. As a result, the special figure 1 hold designation command reflecting the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter is transmitted. In the subcommand set process, the process of setting the specified command in the subcommand buffer is executed. The set command may be sent by the subcommand set process or may be sent by another module.

Step S308: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter (second special symbol operation storage number counter).

Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 2 hold designation command).

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the subcommand set process. As a result, the special symbol 2 hold designation command reflecting the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter is transmitted.

Step S314: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the command set process a number of times. By this processing, the number-cutting counter value command related to the time-saving number-cutting counter and the probability variation number-cutting counter is transmitted.

Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the launch position designation flag.

Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (launch position designation command). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S320 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the subcommand set process. As a result, a launch position designation command reflecting the value of the launch position designation flag is transmitted.

Step S322: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special game management phase.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (a special phase designation command at power-on).

Step S326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the subcommand set process. As a result, a launch position specification command that reflects the value of the special game management phase is transmitted.

Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special game management phase.

Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is not the special symbol change waiting state designated value (00H).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is not the value specified in the special symbol change waiting state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is not the specified value for the special symbol change waiting state (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is the specified value for the special symbol change waiting state. The main control CPU 72 executes step S332.

Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the command request flag for the customer waiting effect.

Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (customer waiting designation command).

Step S336: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the subcommand set process. As a result, the customer waiting specification command reflecting the value of the customer waiting effect command request flag is transmitted.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a program for subcommand set processing at power-on according to the embodiment.

In this module, the input register (argument), output register (return value), and protection register (register whose value does not change in this module) are not set.

The first "RST KICMDST" is a process for calling the model command setting process.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_TZ1_MEM)" is a process of loading the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter, and loads the value of R_TZ1_MEM (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter) into the A register.

The next "LD DE, @ CMD_TZ1_MEM" is a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 1 hold designation command), and loads the value of @CMD_TZ1_MEM (special figure 1 hold designation command) into the DE register.

The next "RST SBCMDST" is a process of calling the subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_TZ2_MEM)" is a process of loading the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter, and loads the value of R_TZ2_MEM (special symbol 2 reserved ball counter) into the A register.

The next "LD DE, @ CMD_TZ2_MEM" is a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 2 hold designation command), and loads the value of @CMD_TZ2_MEM (special figure 2 hold designation command) into the DE register.

The next "RST SBCMDST" is a process of calling the subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

The next "CALLF CTCMDST" is a process of calling the number-of-times command set process.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_HSY_FLG)" is a process of loading the launch position designation flag, and loads the value of R_HSY_FLG (launch position designation flag) into the A register.

The next "LD DE, @CMD_HSY_POS" is a process of setting a subcommand (launch position designation command), and loads @CMD_HSY_POS (launch position designation command) into the DE register.

The next "RST SBCMDST" is a process of calling the subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_TOK_PHS)" is a process of loading the special game management phase, and loads the value of R_TOK_PHS (special game management phase) into the A register.

The next "LD DE, @CMD_TOK_PHS" is a process for setting a subcommand (power-on special phase specification command), and loads the value of @CMD_TOK_PHS (power-on special phase specification command) into the DE register.

The next "RST SBCMDST" is a process of calling the subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_TOK_PHS)" is a process of loading the special game management phase, and loads the value of R_TOK_PHS (special game management phase) into the A register.

The next "RET NTZ" is a process of returning if it is not a special symbol change waiting state specified value.

The next "CLRQ (LOW R_DEM_FLG)" is a process of clearing the command request flag for the customer waiting effect.

The next "LD DE, @CMD_DEM_SET" is a process of setting a subcommand (customer waiting specification command), and loads the value of @CMD_DEM_SET (customer waiting specification command) into the DE register.

The next "RST SBCMDST" is a process of calling the subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
This module sets the game state when the power is turned on as a subcommand.
Specifically, the number of reserved balls, the number of remaining times such as time reduction, right-handed instruction, special game management phase (state of processing of special symbol / big hit), and subcommands related to customer waiting instruction are set.

Further, this module is a module that is called when the power is turned on regardless of when the RWM clear is started (when the RAM is cleared) or when the power is restored.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of subcommand set processing at power-on.

The program of the comparative example is different from the program of the embodiment in that three lines of "RLCA instructions" are added ((1) to (3) in FIGS. 12).

Since the program of the comparative example is a program of a gaming machine with a probability variation region, the content of the program is different from that of the gaming machine not equipped with the probability variation region of the embodiment, but the basic flow has not changed. Further, the program of the comparative example is a program for comparison with the present embodiment and does not constitute the prior art.

The first "RLCA instruction" is a process of calculating the subsequent command addition value, and the value of the launch position specification flag set in the A register by "LDQ A, (LOW R_HSY_FLG)" one line before is set to 1. This is the process of shifting the bit to the left (the process of rotating to the upper side).
The second "RLCA instruction" is also a process of shifting the value of the firing position designation flag set in the A register to the left by 1 bit.
The third "RLCA instruction" is also a process of shifting the value of the firing position designation flag set in the A register to the left by 1 bit.

As a result, when "00H" is set in the A register, the value of the A register does not change by three "RLCA instructions", and finally "00H" is set in the A register. ..

On the other hand, when "20H" is set in the A register, "40H" is set in the A register by the first "RLCA instruction", and "80H" is set in the A register by the second "RLCA instruction". It is set, and "01H" is set in the A register by the third "RLCA instruction".

Since the program of the embodiment does not have three "RLCA instructions" like the program of the comparative example, the amount of code can be reduced by 3 bytes as compared with the program of the comparative example. The "RLCA instruction" is a 1-byte instruction.
Further, since the same processing is performed in the launch position designation management process, the code amount can be reduced by a total of 6 bytes in the present embodiment.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the launch position designation flag and the launch position designation command of the embodiment and the comparative example.

[Embodiment]
In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), when the "striking method" is "normal striking (left striking)", the value of the "launch position designation flag" is "00H", and the launch position designation command The value of is "C0H00H". Note that "C0H" is a preceding value indicating the type of the "launch position designation flag", and "00H" is a succeeding value indicating the content of the "launch position designation flag".

When the "striking method" is "right-handed", the value of the "launch position designation flag" is "20H", and the value of the launch position designation command is "C0H20H".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the "launch position designation flag" and the value of the subsequent value of the "launch position designation command" completely match.

[Comparative example]
In the comparative example, as shown in FIG. 13B, when the "striking method" is "normal striking", the value of the "launch position designation flag" is "00H", and the value of the launch position designation command is "00H". It becomes "C0H00H". This point is the same as that of the embodiment.

On the other hand, when the "striking method" is "right-handed", the value of the "launch position designation flag" is "20H", and the value of the launch position designation command is "C0H01H".

As described above, in the comparative example, the value of the "launch position designation flag" and the value of the subsequent value of the "launch position designation command" do not completely match.

[Summary of launch position specification commands]
The main control device 70 should launch the game ball into the first game area (left-handed area) according to the progress of the game, or launch the game ball into the second game area (right-handed area) different from the first game area. Decide whether to fire and set the decision contents to the launch position designation flag (launch position designation flag setting means). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball should be launched in the first game area, "00H" is set in the launch position designation flag, and it is determined that the game ball should be launched in the second game area. If so, set the launch position designation flag to "20H". Then, the main control device 70 stores the value of the launch position designation flag in the launch position designation command without changing the value, and transmits the launch position designation command to the effect control device 124 (launch position designation information transmitting means).

Further, when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), the main control device 70 displays a launch position designation lamp 38f indicating an aspect indicating that the game ball should be fired in the second game area. Be prepared. Then, when the main control device 70 determines that the game ball should be launched in the second game area, the main control device 70 sets a value (20H) for specifying the launch position designation lamp 38f in the launch position designation flag.

Further, the main control device 70 issues a launch position designation command (in the effect control return process, the effect control output process, or the launch position designation management process) when the power of the main control device 70 is turned on or the value of the launch position designation flag changes. Send.

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for permitting interruption.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. The dynamic port output process outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, and the second special symbol display device 35. , The first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like are turned on and controlled.

In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the special game management process or the normal game management process. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. The port input process is a process of reading various input port information. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the winning port switch 81 is read.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. The timer update process is a process of updating the counters of various timers.

Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes the switch management process. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of the event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Then, another process is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch management process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S208, Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game management process and the normal game management process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special game management process (step S208), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special game management process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal game management process (step S209), the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (normal symbol hit determination random number) acquired in the previous switch management process (step S207) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and in this normal game management process. A random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not the value falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is fluctuated by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes a state management process (security management process). The state management process is a process of determining various errors and setting according to the error determination result.

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. The winning opening switch process is a process of checking switches such as a general winning opening, a starting winning opening, and a large winning opening, and adding a corresponding counter for controlling a winning ball.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control management process. The payout control management process is a process of generating and outputting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in the winning opening switch process.

In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203). Output the prize ball instruction command.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for four game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes the launch position designation management process. In the launch position designation management process, the main control CPU 72 should launch the game ball into the first game area (according to the internal state) according to the progress of the game, or to the second game area different from the first game area. Decide whether to launch the game ball and set the content of the decision in the launch position designation flag (launch position designation flag setting means).

For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, or when the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), etc. The control CPU 72 sets a value (20H) indicating right-handedness in the firing position designation flag. In other cases, the main control CPU 72 sets a value (00H) indicating left-handedness in the firing position designation flag.

Then, when the value of the launch position designation flag changes, the main control CPU 72 stores the value of the launch position designation flag after the change in the subsequent value of the launch position designation command without changing the value, and issues the launch position designation command. It is transmitted to the effect control device 124 (launch position designation information transmitting means).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f based on the value of the launch position designation flag. When the value of the launch position designation flag is set to a value (20H) indicating right-handed strike, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. As a result, when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), the launch position designation lamp 38f displays (lights up) an aspect indicating that the game ball should be launched in the second game area. (Launch position designation display means). When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF) can be set.

Step S214: The main control CPU 72 executes the external information management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in the request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5".

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes the test signal management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes the LED display setting process. The LED display setting process is a process for setting common data for lighting control of various display devices (LEDs) such as a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device in a common output buffer.

Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid data setting process. The solenoid data setting process is a process for storing output data of various solenoids in an output port buffer.

Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. The port output process is a process of outputting the value of the common output buffer stored in each output port buffer to the output port. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information management process to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a port in which the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer are combined. Output.

Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S220: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next interrupt.

[Switch management process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch management process (step S207 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation storage number (normal symbol holding ball number counter) by 1. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (a vacant area having a small number among the random number storages 1 to 4 (holding area) determined per normal symbol). When the normal symbol memory update process is completed or when the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 14).
The main control CPU 72 first acquires a random number per ordinary symbol, then confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit, and if it does not reach the upper limit, the acquired ordinary symbol. This process may be executed by the procedure of storing the random number value per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Such a processing procedure can also be applied to the case of acquiring and storing other random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management phase (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In a case other than during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management processing (FIG. 15).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 16), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 16) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management phase (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), so here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 16 and step S46 in FIG. 17) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a special figure destination determination effect command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach fluctuation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the special figure destination determination effect command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process after executing the determination result management process in step S82, and calls the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or the second special symbol. The process returns to the memory update process (FIG. 17). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and if the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this corresponds to the "probability variation symbol", for example, the probability state schedule flag is set. "A0H" is set. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this random number corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to the "normal symbol" or the "probability variation symbol". The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the previous determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous judgment result is set. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule (). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 17).

[Large winning opening over-winning monitoring process]
Next, FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the large winning opening excess winning monitoring process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.
The large winning opening excess winning monitoring process is a process called in the first large winning opening counting process (S20 in FIG. 15) or the second large winning opening counting process (S21b in FIG. 15).

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special game management phase.

[Special game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (inside the key brackets) of the special game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (6) of the game corresponding to the special symbol, for example, as follows.
(1) Waiting for special symbol change: "00H"
(2) Special symbol changing state: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stopped state: "02H"
(4) Waiting for the opening of the special electric accessory: "03H"
(5) Special electric accessory opening state: "04H (big hit big prize opening control state specified value)"
(6) Special electric accessory closed state: "05H"
(7) Special electric accessory end time state: "06H (big hit big prize opening end weight state specified value)"

The value of the special game management phase can be set as follows, separately for the big hit and the small hit.
(1) Waiting for special symbol change: "00H"
(2) Special symbol changing state: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display status: "02H"
(4) Big hit big prize state before opening: "03H"
(5) Big hit big prize opening control state: "04H"
(6) Big hit big prize opening closed Effective state: "05H"
(7) Big hit big prize opening closing end weight state: "06H"
(8) State before opening the small hit big prize opening: "07H"
(9) Small hit big prize opening control state: "08H"
(10) Small hit big prize opening closed Effective state: "09H"
(11) Small hit big prize opening closing end weight state: "0AH"

The "special symbol change waiting state" is a state in which the change of the special symbol is started when there is a hold. The "special symbol changing state" is a state in which the special symbol is changing. The "special symbol stop symbol display state" is a state in which the change of the special symbol is completed and the lottery result is being displayed. The "state before the release of the big hit big prize opening" is a state in which a special symbol lottery is won (big hit) and a special electric accessory is waited for operation (opening of the attacker). The "big hit big winning opening release control state" is a state in which the special electric accessory is operating. The "big hit big winning opening closed effective state" is the winning valid state after the special electric accessory is activated. Even if the game ball passes through the count switch in the large winning opening, it is not an illegal winning. The "big hit big prize opening closing end weight state" is a state in which the operation of the special electric accessory is completed.

The "state before the release of the small hit big winning opening" is a state in which a special symbol lottery is won (small hit) and a special electric accessory is waited for operation (opening of the attacker). The "small hit large winning opening release control state" is a state in which the special electric accessory is in operation. The "small hit large winning opening closed effective state" is the winning valid state after the special electric accessory is activated. Even if the game ball passes through the count switch in the large winning opening, it is not an illegal winning. The "small hit big winning opening closing end weight state" is a state in which the operation of the special electric accessory is completed.

Step S4252: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming the special game management phase.

Step S4254: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is the value specified in the jackpot open winning control state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is the value specified in the jackpot opening control state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is the value specified in the jackpot opening control state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4256.

Step S4256: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming the special game management phase.

Step S4258: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the value specified in the jackpot jackpot end weight state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the value specified for the jackpot jackpot end weight state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the value specified for the jackpot jackpot end weight state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4260.

Step S4260: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the winning ball number counter while the jackpot jackpot is closed.

Step S4262: The main control CPU 72 executes the byte counter subtraction process. The details of the process will be described later. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4264 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S4264: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the winning ball number counter during the jackpot jackpot closing is not changed from 1 to 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning ball number counter does not change from 1 to 0 while the jackpot jackpot is closed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the winning ball counter during the jackpot jackpot closing does not change from 1 to 0 (No), that is, the value of the winning ball counter during the jackpot jackpot closing changes from 1 to 0. If it is confirmed that this has been done, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4266.

Step S4266: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

Step S4268: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

Step S4270: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening excess winning number counter is less than the large winning opening excess winning error detection determination value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening excess winning number counter is less than the large winning opening excess winning error detection determination value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the large winning opening excess winning count counter is less than the large winning opening excess winning error detection judgment value (No), that is, the value of the large winning opening excessive winning count counter is the large winning opening. When it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than the excess winning error detection determination value, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4272.

Step S427: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

Step S4274: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a lower byte (subsequent value) of a subcommand (designation for occurrence of an excess winning opening error).

Step S4276: The main control CPU 72 executes the security setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes error determination processing and subcommand generation / transmission processing.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Byte counter subtraction selection process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the byte counter subtraction selection process.

Step S4280: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the contents of the subtraction target ram.

Step S4282: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the content of the subtraction target ram is 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the subtraction target ram is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the subtraction target ram is 0 (No), that is, when the content of the subtraction target ram is 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4284.

Step S4284: The main control CPU 72 executes a process (post-comparison flag setting instruction) for comparing the contents of the subtraction target ram with “2 (special value)”.

Step S4286: The main control CPU 72 executes a process (calculation instruction) of subtracting 1 from the contents of the ram to be subtracted.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a part of the program of the large winning opening excess winning monitoring process.
In addition, in the program of the large winning opening excess winning monitoring process, only the part necessary for the explanation is extracted and displayed.

In the figure, the first four commands correspond to the process of updating the winning ball counter while the jackpot jackpot is closed. The next two instructions correspond to the large winning opening excess winning number counter update process. The last four commands correspond to the processing at the time of the large winning opening excess winning error.

The first "LDQ HL, LOW R_TDO_CNT" is a process of setting the address of the winning ball counter during the jackpot jackpot closing, and the value of the winning ball counter (LOW R_TDO_CNT) during the jackpot jackpot closing in the HL register. Loads.

The next "CALLF BYTEDEC" is a process of calling the byte counter subtraction process.

The next "RET NC" is a process of returning if the number of winning balls counter does not change from "1 to 0" while the jackpot jackpot is closed. Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "0", the process returns to the caller.

The next "INC HL" is a process of setting the address of the large winning opening excess winning number counter. When 1 is added to the current HL register, the address of the large winning opening excess winning number counter is set.

The next "INC (HL)" is a process of adding 1 to the counter for the number of times the large winning opening is excessively won.
The next "JCP C, (HL), @ TDN_KNK_MAX, TDOVCHK_99" branches to "TDOVCHK_99: (label)" if the large winning opening excess winning number counter is less than the large winning opening excess winning error detection judgment value. It is a process.

The next "LDE, LOW @CMD_ERR_TDO" is a process of setting the lower byte of the subcommand (designation of over-winning error of the big winning opening), and in the E register, "designating the occurrence of over-winning error of the big winning opening (@CMD_ERR_TDO)". ) ”, Load the low-order byte.

The next "RST SEC_SET" is a process of calling the security setting process arranged in the restart area.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
Here, a method of using the byte counter subtraction process in the large winning opening excess winning monitoring process (TDovCHK) will be described.
The large winning opening excess winning monitoring process is a process called when there is a winning in the large winning opening. This is a process of determining an error state when there are too many winning balls in the time when the winning is valid immediately after the big winning opening is closed. For example, when the big prize opening is closed with 10 prizes, it is judged to be abnormal when a total of 14 or more prizes are won.

In addition, in a process different from this module (program of over-winning monitoring process of big winning opening), when the big winning opening is closed, the judgment value (for example, 4) is set in the winning ball counter (R_TDO_CNT) during closing of the big winning opening. ) Is set.

In FIG. 22 (1), the address of the "big hit big winning opening closed winning ball counter" is set in the HL register.

Then, in FIG. 22 (2), the byte counter subtraction process is called.

As a result of calling the byte counter subtraction process, the carry flag is 0 except when the value of the "big hit big winning opening closed winning ball number counter" is 1 to 0, so in FIG. 22 (3). ), Return to the caller.

On the other hand, if the value of the "big hit big winning opening closed winning ball number counter" changes from 1 to 0 as a result of calling the byte counter subtraction process, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred because the carry flag is 1. , In FIG. 22 (3), the subsequent processing is continuously executed without returning to the caller.

To briefly explain the subsequent processing, this abnormality (an abnormality that there are 14 or more prizes in one round game) has reached the big prize opening excess prize error detection judgment value (for example, twice during the big hit). If so, the security signal is output and a set of subcommands is executed as an error occurs.
The above is an example of the caller of the byte counter subtraction process.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a program for byte counter subtraction processing (first example).

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the subtraction target ram address (for example, the address of the winning ball counter while the jackpot big winning opening is closed) is set in the HL register.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller. The contents of the target ram before subtraction are set in the A register, and the update result flag value is set in the carry flag of the F register. Then, the update result flag value is set in the zero flag of the F register.

The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers, DE registers, and HL registers.

The first "LDA, (HL)" is a process of loading the contents of the ram to be subtracted, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register in the A register (for example, the number of winning balls while the jackpot jackpot is closed). Load the counter).

The next "RT Z, A" is a process of returning if the content of the ram to be subtracted is 0, and returns to the caller if the value of the winning ball counter is 0 while the jackpot jackpot is closed.

The next "CP 2" is a process of comparing the contents of the subtraction target ram with 2 (post-comparison flag setting command).

The next "DEC (HL)" is a process of subtracting 1 from the contents of the ram to be subtracted, and the value of the winning ball counter while the jackpot big winning opening is closed is subtracted by 1 (calculation instruction).

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
The byte counter subtraction process is a process called when the timer counter, the number of times, and the like are subtracted.
Further, the byte counter subtraction process returns to the caller without executing any process if the value of the subtraction target ram (RWM) specified in the HL register is 0, and the value of the subtraction target ram specified in the HL register. If is not 0, it is a module that subtracts 1 from the value of the ram to be subtracted. If the value of the ram to be subtracted changes from 1 to 0, a flag (carry flag) indicating that is set.

The byte counter subtraction process in the large winning opening excess winning monitoring process (TDOVCHK) is used to subtract the number of balls that may be detected when there is a winning number immediately after the large winning opening is closed. Then, when the value after subtraction changes from 1 to 0, it is determined that an excessive winning has occurred.

In the byte counter subtraction process of the present embodiment, the use of the "SCF instruction" is avoided and the "RT Z, A instruction" is used for the return determination to the caller in order to reduce the code.

The "RT Z, A instruction" in FIG. 23 (1) is an instruction that returns to the caller if the value of the A register is 0, and proceeds to the next process otherwise. Internally, the "OR A instruction" and the "RET Z instruction" are executing the same contents. In this case, the carry flag is always reset, the zero flag is set if A = 0, and reset if A ≠ 0.

The "CP 2 instruction" in FIG. 23 (2) is an instruction used to avoid using the "SCF instruction".
The details of the processing of the "CP 2 instruction" will be described below.

(A) When the value of RWM (subtraction target ram) is 0 When the value of RWM is 0, the caller is returned in (1) in FIG. 23, so (2) in FIG. 23 is not executed. When returning to the caller, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set.

(B) When the value of RWM is 1, "1" and "2" are compared by the "CP 2 instruction". Since "1 <2", the carry flag is set and the zero flag is reset. After that, the value of RWM is subtracted by 1 by the "DEC (HL) instruction" in FIG. 23 (3). Since this instruction does not change the carry flag at all, the carry flag remains set. On the other hand, since the value of RWM has changed from 1 to 0, the zero flag is changed to a set. As a result, the carry flag is set and the caller is returned with the zero flag set.

(C) When the value of RWM is 2, "2" and "2" are compared by the "CP 2 instruction". Since "2 = 2", the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set. After that, the value of RWM is subtracted by 1 by the "DEC (HL) instruction" in FIG. 23 (3). Since this instruction does not change the carry flag at all, the carry flag remains reset. On the other hand, the value of RWM changes from 2 to 1, and the result of the change is other than 0, so the zero flag is changed to reset. As a result, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is also reset and returned to the caller.

(D) When the value of RWM is 3 or more Here, the case where the value of RWM is "3" will be described. "3" and "2" are compared by the "CP 2 instruction". Since "3>2", the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set. After that, the value of RWM is subtracted by 1 by the "DEC (HL) instruction" in FIG. 23 (3). This instruction does not change the carry flag at all, so the carry flag remains reset. Since the value of RWM changes from 3 to 2 and the result of the change is non-zero, the zero flag remains reset. As a result, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is also reset and returned to the caller.

Summarizing the above, the relationship is as follows.
(A) When the value of RWM is 0, the value of RWM does not change, the zero flag is set, and the carry flag is reset.
(B) When the value of RWM is 1, the value of RWM becomes 0, the zero flag is set, and the carry flag is also set.
(C) When the RWM value is 2 or more, the RWM value is subtracted by 1, the zero flag is reset, and the carry flag is also reset.

The byte counter subtraction process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a program for byte counter subtraction processing (second example).
The difference between the first example and the second example is that the A register of the output register has disappeared.
There is no change in the contents of the program. The second example is effective when the caller refers to the value of the A register and executes the process.

[Summary of byte counter subtraction processing]
In this way, the byte counter subtraction process (value change confirmation module) compares the value of the predetermined register (A register) with the preset special data value (2), and the value of the predetermined register is the special data. If the comparison result is smaller than the value of, a special flag (carry flag) is set, and the value of the predetermined register is larger than the value of the special data, or the value of the predetermined register and the value of the special data are the same. If the comparison result is, the post-comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) that executes the process of resetting the special flag with one instruction is executed, and the special flag is set by the post-comparison flag setting instruction. If there is, it indicates that the first value (1) has changed to the second value (0) (the value of the operation target ram has changed from 1 to 0), and the special flag is set by the post-comparison flag setting command. When reset, it is a module indicating that the first value has not changed to the second value. The main control device 70 includes a byte counter subtraction process (value change confirmation module).

Further, the byte counter subtraction process is called in a state where the address of the area in which the calculation target data to be calculated is stored is set in the specified register (HL register) as an argument.

Further, in the byte counter subtraction process, the value of the special flag (carry flag) is set in the special register (F register) as the return value (for example, bit 0 of the F register).

Furthermore, in the byte counter subtraction process, after the comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) is executed, the value of the operation target data to be calculated (the value of the subtraction target ram) is set to a predetermined operation instruction (DEC (HL)). Calculate with the instruction).

In addition, the byte counter subtraction process returns to the caller without executing any processing when the value of the calculation target data (subtraction target ram) to be calculated is 0, and the calculation target to be calculated If the data value is not 0, the post-comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) is executed, and then the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the calculation target data to be calculated is executed.

Moreover, in the byte counter subtraction process, the value of the special data (“2” of the CP 2 instruction) is the operation value (“1” corresponding to 1 subtraction) calculated by the predetermined operation instruction and the final value of the predetermined register. A special value (“2”) is set by adding the value (“1”) immediately before the target value (“0”).

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of the byte counter subtraction process.
The byte counter subtraction process of the comparative example used the SCF instruction to set the carry flag when the value of the subtraction target ram (the value of RWM) changed from 1 to 0. Therefore, a total of 9 bytes were used.

The first "LDA, (HL)" is a process of loading the contents of the ram to be subtracted.
The next "OR A" is a process for confirming data.
The next "RET Z" is a process of returning if the data is 0.
The next "DEC (HL)" is a process of subtracting 1 from the contents of the ram to be subtracted.
The next "RET NZ" is a process of returning if the subtraction result is not 0.
The next "SCF" is a process of setting a carry flag.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

In the comparative example program, the program capacity was increased because the only idea was to use the "SCF instruction" when setting the carry flag. However, in the first and second examples of the present embodiment, the "SCF instruction" is used. The carry flag is set using the new idea of not using.

In the programs of the first example and the second example, "LDA, (HL)" is "1 byte", "RT Z, A" is "1 byte", and "CP 2" is "2 bytes". "DEC (HL)" is "1 byte", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "6 bytes".

On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte", "OR A" is "1 byte", "RET Z" is "1 byte", and "DEC". (HL) "is" 1 byte "," RET NZ "is" 1 byte "," SCF "is" 2 bytes "," RET "is" 1 byte ", and the total program capacity. Is "8 bytes".

When the first example and the second example are compared with the comparative example, the program capacity of the module is reduced by "2 bytes".
Further, when the first example and the second example are compared with the comparative example, the processing time of the module is "reduced by about 19% when the value of RWM before subtraction is 0 or 1".

[Special game management process]
Next, the details of the special game management process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special game management process. The special game management process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special game management phase). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special game management phase: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (special game management phase: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and performs the special symbol change processing. If the above is completed (special game management phase: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is called "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 16 times in total, these are called "16 rounds". May be generically referred to. As described above, the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games (unit games), and an upper limit number regarding the number of winnings of the game ball in one round game is set in each big winning opening. Then, the winning of the game balls exceeding the upper limit becomes an over winning, and the payout of the game balls is also executed as usual.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh to 16th rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol is highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "4 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "7 rounds normal jackpot 1"
(3) "7 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(4) "7 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(5) "7 round probability variation jackpot 3"
(6) "10 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(7) "13 rounds normal jackpot 1"
(8) "13 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(9) "13 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(10) "13 round probability variation jackpot 3"
(11) "16 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(12) "16 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(13) "16 round probability variation jackpot 3"
In addition, in this embodiment, a big hit other than these may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "4 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "4 round probability variation symbol 1", "7 round normal jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "7 round probability variation symbol 1", and "7 round probability variation jackpot 1". "Corresponds to the jackpot of" 7 round probability variation symbol 1 "," 7 round probability variation jackpot 2 "corresponds to the jackpot of" 7 round probability variation symbol 2 ", and" 7 round probability variation jackpot 3 "corresponds to" 7 round probability variation jackpot 3 ". Corresponding to the jackpot of "Symbol 3", "10 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", and "13 round normal jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "13 round normal symbol 1". Correspondingly, "13 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "13 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "13 round probability variation symbol 2", and "13 rounds" "Probability change jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "16 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "16 round probability variation symbol 1", and "16 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot. Corresponding to the jackpot of "16 round probability variation symbol 2", "16 round probability variation jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of "16 round probability variation symbol 3". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

[4 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "4 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.06 seconds). For this reason, the jackpot game of "4 round probability variation symbol 1" is a game in which almost no balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[7 round normal symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "7 round normal symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "7 rounds normal symbol 1" is a game in which the player is given 7 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

[7 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "7 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the 1st to 7th rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.06 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of "7-round probability variation symbol 1" is a game in which almost no balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). ). In this case, in the first to seventh rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "7 rounds normal symbols 2 and 3" is a game in which the player is given 7 rounds of balls (prize balls).

[10 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the 1st to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is a game in which 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[13 rounds normal symbols 1, 13 rounds probabilistic symbols 1, 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "13 round normal symbol 1" or "13 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" in the process during special symbol stop display, it is an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state. Occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to seventh rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Further, in the 8th to 13th rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.06 seconds open). Therefore, the jackpot game of "13 rounds normal symbol 1" or "13 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is a game in which the player is substantially given 7 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

[13 round probability variation symbol 3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "13 round probability variation symbol 3" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to thirteenth rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "13 round probability variation symbol 3" is a game in which 13 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[16 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to 16th rounds, the second large winning opening (lower large winning opening) of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "16 round probability variation symbol 1" is a game in which 16 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). ). In this case, in the first to 16th rounds, the first large winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.00 seconds). Therefore, the big hit game of "16 rounds probability variation symbols 2 and 3" is a game in which 16 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

Then, when any of the probabilistic symbols is applicable, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state". In addition, if any of the winning symbols is applicable, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is activated. The privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is won a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not have to wait. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "one of the probabilistic symbols", the internal state shifts to the "high probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends.

[Opening time of variable winning device, etc.]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the opening time, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the set values corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

Here, the opening time is the start time set as the time until the big winning opening is opened at the start of the big hit game, and the inter-round interval time is set between the rounds. The waiting time is the waiting time, and the ending time is the end time set at the end of the jackpot game (after the final round is completed). The interval time between rounds may or may not be set after the final round is completed.

The jackpot game (special game) consists of an opening time (start time) set at the start of the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit game), and an ending time (end time) set at the end of the jackpot game. Has been done.

[13 rounds normal symbols 1, 13 rounds probabilistic symbols 1, 2]
If the winning symbol corresponds to "13 round normal symbol 1" or "13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2", the opening time is set to 10.000 seconds (however, 5.000 seconds when winning in the shortened time state). Will be done. The inter-round interval time is set as a time obtained by adding 1.492 seconds (or 0.492 seconds) as the winning opening closing effective time to 0.008 seconds as the winning opening closing time. The ending time is set to 4.648 seconds.

[16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2]
When the winning symbol corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the opening time is set to 3.500 seconds. The inter-round interval time is set as a time obtained by adding 0.292 seconds as the winning opening closing effective time to 0.008 seconds as the winning opening closing time. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

[7 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to "7 round probability variation symbol 1", the opening time is set to 8.500 seconds (however, 0.500 seconds when the winning symbol is won in the shortened time state). The inter-round interval time is set as the time obtained by adding the grand prize opening closing time of 0.492 seconds to the grand winning opening closing time of 0.008 seconds. The ending time is set to 3.588 seconds.

[4 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to "4 round probability variation symbol 1", the opening time is set to 8.500 seconds (however, 0.500 seconds when the winning symbol is won in the shortened time state). The inter-round interval time is set as the time obtained by adding the grand prize opening closing time of 0.492 seconds to the grand winning opening closing time of 0.008 seconds. The ending time is set to 5.268 seconds.

[7 round normal symbol 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to "7 round normal symbol 1", the opening time is set to 5.000 seconds. The interval time between rounds is set as the time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the closing time of the winning opening to 1.492 seconds as the closing time of the winning opening. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

[16 round probability variation symbol 3, 13 round probability variation symbol 3, 10 round probability variation symbol 1, 7 round probability variation symbol 2, 7 round probability variation symbol 3]
If the winning symbol corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "7 round probability variation symbol 2" or "7 round probability variation symbol 3", the opening time will be Set to 3.500 seconds. The interval time between rounds is set as the time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the closing time of the winning opening to 1.492 seconds as the closing time of the winning opening. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening time, the opening time, the interval time between rounds, the ending time, etc. of the big winning opening are different depending on the winning symbol. It should be noted that these specific numerical values are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the end of the small hit game, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but it is also possible to use a game specification in which a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery, predetermined lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the normal probability state. To. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) corresponding to the jackpot in the special symbol hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the value corresponding to the big hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and whether or not the read random number value is included in this range. (Lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (02H) corresponding to the small hit in the special symbol hit flag, and then in step S2400. move on. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in ROM 74, read out, and a big hit determination may be made while comparing with a random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) corresponding to the jackpot is set in the special symbol hit flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) corresponding to the jackpot is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (02H) corresponding to a small hit is set in the special symbol hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (02H) corresponding to the small hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit or the small hit by the individual big hit flag and the small hit flag, instead of discriminating the big hit or the small hit by the value of the common hit flag called the special symbol hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is supposed to be. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction state) at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table that is referred to when the player loses the position in the low-probability non-time reduction state (when non-winning is applicable) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" is provided with stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)". Therefore, "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "6" and "7" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. Corresponding, the fluctuation pattern number "8" corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after super reach (for example, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time longer than the reach). The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (hereinafter, the same applies).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3 to 12 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" has a longer fluctuation. It corresponds to the time (for example, about 15 to 180 seconds).

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, when the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state) at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "21" to "28" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. However, since the fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" are non-reach fluctuations due to time-shortening fluctuations, a shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time in the normal state. ..

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state) at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "41" to "48" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "45" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "46" to "48" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 29: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, 13 types of winning symbols are roughly divided as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 13 types is as follows.

(1) "4 round probability variation symbol 1"
(2) "7 round normal symbol 1"
(3) "7 round probability variation symbol 1"
(4) "7 round probability variation symbol 2"
(5) "7 round probability variation symbol 3"
(6) "10 round probability variation symbol 1"
(7) "13 round normal symbol 1"
(8) "13 round probability variation symbol 1"
(9) "13 round probability variation symbol 2"
(10) "13 round probability variation symbol 3"
(11) "16 round probability variation symbol 1"
(12) "16 round probability variation symbol 2"
(13) "16 round probability variation symbol 3"

In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "4 round probability variation symbol 1", "4 round probability variation symbol 1a", "4 round probability variation symbol 1b", "4 round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value is "35", "3", "22", "24", " "4" and "12" correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, "13 round normal symbol 1", "16 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 2", corresponding to each distribution value, "7-round probability variation symbol 1" and "4-round probability variation symbol 1" are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "13 round normal symbol 1" is 35/100 (= 35%), and the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol 1" is It is 3/100 (= 3%), and the ratio of selecting "13 round probability variation symbol 1" is 22/100 (= 22%). In addition, the ratio of selecting "13 round probability variation symbol 2" is 24/100 (= 24%), and the ratio of selecting "7 round probability variation symbol 1" is 4/100 (= 4%). Yes, the ratio of "4 round probability variation symbol 1" selected is 12/100 (= 12%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" to "06H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "13 round normal symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the main control CPU 72 generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number (the limit number of times in the high probability state) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

If it corresponds to "13 rounds normal symbol 1", the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given).
On the other hand, when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2", "7 round probability variation symbol 1" or "4 round probability variation symbol 1", the number of probability variation is given 10,000 times.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (the limit number of times in the time reduction state) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

In the case of "13 rounds normal symbol 1", even if the winning probability of the special symbol is "low probability" or "high probability", it is in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction) or the time reduction state (time reduction). However, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 2", "7 round probability variation symbol 1" or "4 round probability variation symbol 1", a special symbol is won. Regardless of whether the probability is "low probability" or "high probability", or in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction) or the time reduction state (time reduction), the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol is "high probability", and there is no state of non-time reduction (non-time reduction), but such a state may be adopted.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "35", "45", "5", "3" are shown. , "3", "8", "1" correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "7 round normal symbol 1", "16 round probability variation symbol 2", "16 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3" corresponding to the distribution value. "10-round probability variation symbol 1", "7-round probability variation symbol 2", and "7-round probability variation symbol 3" are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "7 round normal symbol 1" is 35/100 (= 35%), and "16 round probability variation symbol 2" is selected. The ratio is 45/100 (= 45%), and the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol 3" is 5/100 (= 5%). In addition, the ratio of selecting "13 round probability variation symbol 3" is 3/100 (= 3%), and the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is 3/100 (= 3%). Yes, the ratio of selecting "7 round probability variation symbol 2" is 8/100 (= 8%), and the ratio of selecting "7 round probability variation symbol 3" is 1/100 (= 1%). is there.

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H" to "07H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "7 round normal symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

When it corresponds to "7 round normal symbol 1", the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given).
On the other hand, in "16 round probability variation symbol 2", "16 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "7 round probability variation symbol 2" or "7 round probability variation symbol 3" If applicable, the number of probable changes is given 10,000 times.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

In the case of "7 round normal symbol 1", even if the winning probability of the special symbol is "low probability" or "high probability", it is in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction) or the time reduction state (time reduction). However, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
On the other hand, in "16 round probability variation symbol 2", "16 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "7 round probability variation symbol 2" or "7 round probability variation symbol 3" If applicable, the number of time reductions will be given 10,000 times regardless of whether the winning probability of the special symbol is "low probability" or "high probability", non-time reduction state (non-time reduction) or time reduction state (time reduction). Will be done.

[See Fig. 29: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is referred to when a big hit is won in a low-probability non-time reduction state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" is provided with stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)". Therefore, "variable pattern numbers""61" to "68" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The variation pattern numbers "61" to "65" correspond to the variation patterns that are hit by the super reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers "66" to "68" correspond to the reach effect (other than the super reach effect). Reach production) is performed and it corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that becomes a hit.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the comparison value. Select a number (variation pattern determination means). For example, when the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "81" to "88" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "101" to "108" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "101" to "108" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 29: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). Further, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is any of the probabilistic symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function operation flag as the game state flag. The process of setting the flag area of the RAM 76 is executed (high probability state transition means, probability fluctuation function operating means, advantageous gaming state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "double open small hit symbol" or "three open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[Fig. 26: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register into the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 29). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 29), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 is next. The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 29).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the stop display display time has expired. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the process during the special symbol stop display.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4102. In this case, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed). The subtraction process of the stop symbol display timer may be executed in the special symbol stop display process, or may be executed in the timer update process.

Step S4102: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the ram set table at the start of the jackpot. As a result, the special symbol hit flag can be referred to.

Step S4104: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special symbol hit flag.

Step S4106: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) corresponding to the big hit is set in the special symbol hit flag. When the value corresponding to the big hit is set in the special symbol hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4118 (connection symbol A → A). On the other hand, when the value corresponding to the big hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4108.

Step S4108: The main control CPU 72 executes the number-cutting management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the following process.

The main control CPU 72 loads the number-cut counter value and confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0, the process returns without executing any processing. On the other hand, if the count-cut counter value is not 0, the count-cut counter value command is generated and then the count-cut counter value is decremented (subtracted by 1). Then, when the subtraction result is 0, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-of-times cut function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time reduction state" corresponding to "any probability variation symbol", the number-of-count counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). Therefore, it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset. In addition, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times counter related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function operation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol.

Step S4110: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the ram set table at the start of the small hit. As a result, the special symbol hit flag can be referred to.

Step S4112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special symbol per mark flag.

Step S4114: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (02H) corresponding to a small hit is set in the special symbol hit flag. When the value corresponding to the small hit is set in the special symbol hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4118 (connection symbol A → A). On the other hand, when the value corresponding to the small hit is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4116.

Step S4116: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table. When the process of step S4116 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

Step S4118: The main control CPU 72 executes the ram set process. In the ram set process, a process is executed in which the values of various RAMs that need to be updated are updated at once when the special symbol at the time of a big hit or a small hit is stopped.

For example, the processing at the time of a big hit is as follows.
The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process at the time of big hit". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "4 round probability variation symbol 1", the value corresponding to "4 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of the jackpot symbol is "7 round normal symbol 1" and "7 round probability variation symbol 1 to 3", the value corresponding to "7 round" is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", the value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of the jackpot symbol is "13 rounds normal symbol 1" and "13 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3", the value corresponding to "13 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3", the value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 29). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "4 round probability variation symbol 1", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "4 rounds". When the type of the jackpot symbol is "7 round normal symbol 1" and "7 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "7 rounds". When the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". When the type of the jackpot symbol is "13 round normal symbol 1" and "13 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "13 rounds". When the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In addition, the processing at the time of a small hit is as follows.
The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S4120: The main control CPU 72 executes the symbol offset acquisition process. By executing this process, the value of the symbol offset corresponding to the winning symbol can be acquired.

The value of the symbol offset is as follows.
The symbol offset is "0" when the first special symbol corresponds to "13 round jackpot (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbol 1)" of the first special symbol is "1".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the "7-round jackpot (7-round probability variation symbol 1)" of the first special symbol is "2".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the "4 round jackpot (4 round probability variation symbol 1)" of the 1st special symbol is "3".

The symbol offset when the second special symbol corresponds to the "7-round jackpot (7-round normal symbol 1)" is "4".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the second special symbol "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)" is "5".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the second special symbol "13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation symbol 3)" is "6".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the second special symbol "10 round jackpot (10 round probability variation symbol 1)" is "7".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to the second special symbol "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2)" is "8".
The symbol offset when it corresponds to "small hit" in the first special symbol lottery is "9".

Step S4120: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the symbol offset.

Step S4124: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the special electric accessory maximum operation number data table. By executing this process, arguments for byte data selection process can be set.

Step S4126: The main control CPU 72 executes the byte data selection process. By executing this process, the "value of the symbol offset" can be converted into the "maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory".

Step S4128: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory acquired in the byte data selection process in the counter of the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory.

Here, the "special electric accessory maximum operation count counter" can be used in the control process during the big hit, but for example, the "big winning opening closing effective process" during the big hit (after the attacker closes during the big hit). It can be used in "Processing for a certain period of time)". In this case, the current values of the "special electric accessory continuous operation count counter (numerical value indicating the current number of rounds)" and the "special electric accessory maximum operation count counter" are compared, and the following is performed according to the comparison result. Branch to proceed to the round or end the jackpot. For example, if the value of the "special electric accessory maximum operation count counter" is "13" and the "special electric accessory continuous operation counter" is "less than 13 (1 to 12)", the "big hit big prize" It shifts to the state before opening the mouth (large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit), and shifts to the next round. On the other hand, if the value of the "special electric accessory continuous operation counter" is "13", the process shifts to the "big hit big winning opening end weight state (big hit end processing)", and the big hit ends.

Step S4130: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of restoring the value of the symbol offset.

Step S4132: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the special electric accessory designation data table. By executing this process, arguments for byte data selection process can be set.

Step S4134: The main control CPU 72 executes the byte data selection process. By executing this process, the "design offset value" can be converted into the "special electric accessory designation data".

Step S4136: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the special electric accessory designation data acquired in the byte data selection process in the special electric accessory designation flag.

Here, the "special electric accessory designation flag" can be used in the count switch passing process (process when the game ball wins the attacker) or the like.
For example, convert the "special electric accessory designation flag" to "count switch bit data", check if the "attacker currently in operation" and the "attacker won by the game ball" are the same, and if they are not the same. If it is judged, it will be counted as an illegal prize. It can also be used to convert the "special electric accessory designation flag" to the "subcommand at the time of winning the attacker (first prize opening prize designation command data or second prize opening prize designation command data)". ..

In addition, the "special electric accessory designation flag" can also be used in the following processing.
(1) Large winning opening opening control processing (large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit)
In this process, the specified number of winnings of the large winning opening is acquired with reference to the "special electric accessory designation flag".
(2) Launch position designation management process In this process, it is determined whether or not a right-handed instruction should be given with reference to the "special electric accessory designation flag".
(3) Test signal management process In this process, the output content of the test signal related to the special electric accessory is acquired with reference to the "special electric accessory designation flag".
(4) Large winning opening closing valid time selection process (large winning opening closing process)
In this process, the winning valid time when the big winning opening is closed (the period during which the winning is not illegal immediately after the big winning opening is closed) is acquired by referring to the "special electric accessory designation flag".

Step S4138: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening time setting process. By executing this process, the opening time can be set according to the winning symbol.

Step S4140: The main control CPU 72 executes the model command setting process. By executing this process, it is possible to set a model command according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

Step S4142: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening designation command generation process.

Step S4144: The main control CPU 72 executes the subcommand set process. By this process, a model command, an opening designation command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management processing.

[Byte data selection process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the byte data selection process.

Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding a selection offset (for example, a symbol offset) to the selection address (for example, the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table, the special electric accessory designation data table, or the like). To do. As a result, the selection result address is calculated.

Step S4202: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading data at the address indicated by the selection result address.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a part of a program for processing during special symbol stop display. In the special symbol stop display processing program, only the part necessary for explanation is extracted and displayed.

The first "CALLF ZUGOFFS" is a process of calling the symbol offset acquisition process.

The next "LD B, A" is a process of saving the value of the symbol offset acquired in the symbol offset acquisition process, and loads the value of the A register into the B register.

The next "LD HL, D_ROU_MAX" is a process of setting the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table, and loads the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table into the HL register.

The next "RST BYTESEL" is a process of calling the byte data selection process, and calls the byte data selection process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ (LOW R_ROU_MAX), A" is a process of saving to the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, and loads the value of the A register into the RAM corresponding to the special electric accessory maximum operation counter.

The next "LD A, B" is a process of restoring the value of the symbol offset, and loads the value of the A register into the B register.

The next "LD HL, D_TDN_FLG" is a process of setting the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table, and loads the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table into the HL register.

The next "RST BYTESEL" is a process of calling the byte data selection process, and calls the byte data selection process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ (LOW R_TDN_FLG), A" is a process of saving in the special electric accessory designation flag, and saves the value of the A register in the RAM corresponding to the special electric accessory designation flag.

[Explanation of the program]
Here, a method of using the byte data selection process in the process during the special symbol stop display will be described. In this process, the byte data selection process is called at two places. The purpose of the byte data selection process here is to set the symbol offset value (numerical value indicating the type of jackpot) to the "maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory (number of rounds of the jackpot)" and the "special electric accessory designation flag (). It is to convert to "a value indicating which attacker operates)".

Before calling the byte data selection process, it is necessary to set the start address of the data table in the HL register and set the symbol offset value in the A register as an argument of the byte data selection process. In this example, instead of setting the value in the A register, the "design offset acquisition process" is called in FIG. 42 (1). The details of the symbol offset acquisition process are omitted, but for example, "A register = 0 for a 13-round jackpot of the first special symbol 1" and "A register = 1 for a 16-round jackpot of the first special symbol". , "A register = 2 if the jackpot is 7 rounds of the first special symbol", and the value of the symbol offset according to the type of jackpot is set in the A register.

It is the part (2) in FIG. 42 that sets the start address of the table in the HL register. The table used here is a data table for the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a data table of the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory.
The special electric accessory maximum operation count data table is a set of 1-byte data (defined in the DB).

The first "D_ROU_MAX:" is a label indicating the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table, and the address matches the top "DB @ BHT_ROU_13".

The first "DB @ BHT_ROU_13" is the data of the maximum number of operations of the 13R special electric accessory, and corresponds to "13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)" in the first special symbol lottery. This is the data used in the case. For example, the value of "13" is stored in "@BHT_ROU_13 (13R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_16" is the data of the maximum number of operations of the 16R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to the "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "16" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_16 (16R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_7" is the data on the maximum number of times the 7R special electric accessory is operated, and is the data used when it corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "7" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_7 (7R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_4" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the 4R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to "4 round jackpot (4 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the 1st special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "4" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_4 (data on the maximum number of operations of the 4R special electric accessory)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_7" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the 7R special electric accessory, and is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round normal symbol 1)". For example, the value of "7" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_7 (7R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_16" is the data of the maximum number of operations of the 16R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbols 2, 3)" in the second special symbol lottery. is there. For example, the value of "16" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_16 (16R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_13" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the 13R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to the "13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation symbol 3)" in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "13" is stored in "@BHT_ROU_13 (13R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_10" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the 10R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to the "10 round jackpot (10 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "10" is stored in "@BHT_ROU_10 (data on the maximum number of operations of the 10R special electric accessory)".

The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_7" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the 7R special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)" in the 2nd special symbol lottery. is there. For example, the value of "7" is stored in "DB @ BHT_ROU_7 (7R special electric accessory maximum number of operating times data)".

The next "DB @ SHT_ROU_MAX" is the data on the maximum number of operations of the small hit special electric accessory, and is the data used when it corresponds to the "small hit" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "2" is stored in "DB @ SHT_ROU_MAX (data on the maximum number of operations of the small hit special electric accessory)".

Then, by setting the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table as an argument of the byte data selection process, it is possible to prepare to call the byte data selection process (because the argument setting is completed). In FIG. 42 (3), the byte data selection process is called.

In the byte data selection process, the target "maximum number of operations of special electric accessory (number of rounds of big hit)" is set in the A register as a return value, and this is set in the RAM (RWM) in FIG. 42 (4). save.

Subsequently, preparations are made for calling the byte data selection process in FIG. 42 (7).
Regarding the argument, it is necessary to set the value of the symbol offset (type of jackpot) as in the previous time. In this case, the "symbol offset acquisition process" may be called again, but the value of the symbol offset is stored in the B register which is not used here, and it is taken out and used in FIG. 42 (5). ..
Further, in FIG. 42 (6), the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table is set.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special electric accessory designation data table.
The special electric accessory designation data table is an array of 1-byte data (defined in the DB).

The first "D_TDN_FLG:" is a label indicating the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table, and the address matches the top "DB @ TDK_AT1".

The first "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when it corresponds to "13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT2" is the lower special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when it corresponds to "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT2 (lower special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "1" indicating a lower prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, the 4R special electric accessory maximum operation count data, and is "4 round jackpot (4 round probability variation symbol 1)" in the 1st special symbol lottery. This is the data used when applicable. For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when it corresponds to "7 round big hit (7 round normal symbol 1)" in the second special symbol lottery. For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation symbol 3)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "10 round jackpot (10 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)". For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

The next "DB @ TDK_AT1" is the upper special electric accessory designation data, and is the data used when it corresponds to "small hit" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, in "DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)", a value of "0" indicating the upper prize winning opening is stored.

Then, the byte data selection process is called in FIG. 42 (7).
As a return value from the byte data selection process, a value corresponding to the "special electric accessory designation flag" is set in the A register, which is stored in the RAM (RWM) in FIG. 42 (8).
The above is an example of the caller of the byte data selection process.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a program for byte data selection processing (first example).

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, the selection offset (for example, symbol offset) is set in the A register, and the selection address (for example, the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table) is set in the HL register. The start address, the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table, etc.) are set.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller, and the selection result data (value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, value of the special electric accessory designation flag) is stored in the A register. ) Is set, and the selection result address is set in the HL register (the value obtained by adding the symbol offset to the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table, and the value obtained by adding the symbol offset to the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table). Is set.
The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers and DE registers.

The first "ADDWB HL, A" is a process of adding the selection offset to the selected address, and adds the lower byte of the HL register and the byte of the A register.

The next "LDA, (HL)" is a process of loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address, and loads the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register into the A register.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
The byte data selection process is often used in game machines, and is called with the start address (HL register value) and symbol offset value (A register value) of the data table set, and is specified in the table. Overwrites the value of the data (1 byte) in the A register.

In this embodiment, a data table is used by using an instruction (ADDWB HL, A) that adds a pair register (HL) in which two 8-bit registers are paired and another 8-bit register (A register). It makes it easy to access the data in.
The byte data selection process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a program for byte data selection processing (second example).
The differences between the first example and the second example are as follows.
(1) The F register is added to the output register, and the value of the selection result flag (zero flag) is stored in the F register.
(2) An "OR instruction" is added between the "LD instruction" and the "RET instruction".

“OR A” is a process of confirming the selection result data and setting the value of the selection result flag. The "OR A" instruction can be used to check whether a particular piece of data is zero. This result is reflected in the zero flag in the flag register. Then, the value of the zero flag can be used when branching at the caller.

The first example is effective when the caller of the byte data selection process does not perform branching depending on whether or not the selection result data is 0. Since the first example does not require the "OR A" instruction, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the second example.

[Summary of byte data selection process]
In this way, in the byte data selection process (data acquisition module), the data in the first register (A register) having a predetermined number of bits (8 bits) and the second register having a specified number of bits (16 bits) different from the predetermined number of bits The addition value is calculated using the addition instruction (ADDWB instruction) that adds the data of (HL register) with one instruction, and the predetermined data (special electric accessory maximum operation count data,) is calculated based on the calculated addition value. It is a module that acquires predetermined data (8-bit byte data) from a data table (special electric accessory designation data table, special electric accessory designation data table) in which special electric accessory designation data) is stored. .. The main control device 70 includes a byte data selection process (data acquisition module).

Further, the byte data selection process is called with the symbol offset value stored in the A register (first register) and the start address of the data table stored in the HL register (second register) as an argument. ..

Further, in the byte data selection process, selection result data (predetermined data) is set in the A register as a return value, and the selection result address of the data table (address of the area in which the predetermined data is stored) is set in the HL register. Set.

The A register (first register) is a single register using one storage circuit capable of storing 8-bit data. The HL register (second register) is a pair register using two storage circuits capable of storing 8-bit data.

The ADDWB instruction (addition instruction) is an instruction to add all 8 bits of the A register (first register) and the lower 8 bits of the HL register (second register).

Then, the byte data selection process basically converts the data belonging to the predetermined classification received as an argument into the data belonging to another classification different from the predetermined classification.

More specifically, in the byte data selection process, the data indicating the type of winning received as an argument (data related to the winning symbol) is used as data regarding the number of times the electric accessory is operated (data regarding the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory) or. , Converts to at least one of the data (upper or lower special electric accessory designation data) that specifies the electric accessory to be operated.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of byte data selection processing.
The byte data selection process in the comparative example is a code that gives priority to not creating free space.

The first "ADD A, L" is a process of adding the selection offset and the lower byte of the selection address.
The next "LDL, A" is a process of setting the operation result value in the lower byte of the selection result address.
The next "JR NC, BYTESEL_10" is a process of branching to "BYTESEL_10 (label)" if there is no carry.
The next "INC H" is a process of adding 1 to the upper byte of the selected address.
The next "BYTESEL_10:" is the label of the branch destination.
The next "LDA, (HL)" is a process of loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address.
The next "OR A" is a process of confirming the selection result data and setting the selection result flag value.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

In the comparative example program, the program capacity was increased because there was only the idea that the digits had to be aligned when the addition processing between the registers was executed. However, in the first example and the second example of the present embodiment, the digits were changed. The addition process is executed without aligning the digits by using a new idea of using the ADDWB instruction that executes the addition process without aligning.

In the program of the first example, "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte", "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte", and "RET" is "1 byte". The program capacity is "3 bytes".

In the program of the second example, "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte", "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte", "OR A" is "1 byte", and " "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "4 bytes".

On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, "ADD A, L" is "1 byte", "LD L, A" is "1 byte", and "JR NC, BYTESEL_10" is "2 bytes". "INC H" is "1 byte", "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte", "OR A" is "1 byte", and "RET" is "1 byte". , The total program capacity is "8 bytes".

When the first example, the second example and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by "5 bytes in the first example and 4 bytes in the second example".
Further, when the first example and the second example are compared with the comparative example, the processing time of the module can be reduced by 32.4 to 37.5%.
As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be made more stable than before.

[Opening time setting process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening time setting process.

Step S4210: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the opening time data 1 table. By executing this process, arguments for the word data selection process can be set (normal time).

Step S4212: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the time selection flag. The time selection flag is stored in the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 sets “1” when the time is shortened, and sets “0” when the time is not shortened.

Step S4214: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the time selection flag is “0”. If the time selection flag is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4218. On the other hand, when the time selection flag is not "0", that is, when the time selection flag is "1" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4216.

Step S4216: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the opening time data 2 table. By executing this process, arguments for the word data selection process can be set (time saving).

Step S4218: The main control CPU 72 executes the symbol offset acquisition process. By executing this process, the value of the symbol offset corresponding to the winning symbol can be acquired. The content of the process is the same as the content described above.

Step S4220: The main control CPU 72 executes the word data selection process. By executing this process, the "design offset value" can be converted into the "opening time".

Step S4222: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the opening time acquired in the word data selection process in the special game timer (big hit start time timer). The saved special game timer is counted down as the opening time with the passage of time, and is used as a variable for managing the opening time.

[Word data selection process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the word data selection process.

Step S4230: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the selection offset (for example, the symbol offset) twice to the selection address (for example, the start address of the opening time data 1 table, the opening time data 2 table, or the like). As a result, the selection result address is calculated.

Step S4322: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading data at the address indicated by the selection result address.

Step S4234: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the lower byte value of the selection result data in the A register.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a program for opening time setting processing.

The first "LD HL, D_STA_TMR1" is a process of setting the address of the opening time data 1 table, and loads the start address of the opening time data 1 table into the HL register.

The next "LDQ A, (LOW R_TMR_FLG)" is a process of loading the time selection flag, and loads the value of the time selection flag into the A register.

The next "JR TZ, TSTATMR_10" is a process of branching to "TSTATMR_10: (label)" if the time selection flag is 0.

The next "LD HL, D_STA_TMR2" is a process of setting the address of the opening time data 2 table, and loads the start address of the opening time data 2 table into the HL register.

The next "CALLF ZUGOFFS" is a process of calling the symbol offset acquisition process.

The next "RST WORDSEL" is a process of calling the word data selection process, and calls the word data selection process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ (LOW R_TOK_TMR), HL" is a process of saving to the special game timer, and a process of loading the value of the HL register into the special game timer.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
Here, a method of using the word data selection process in the opening time setting process will be described. In this process, the opening time (waiting time for production) is determined at the start of the jackpot.

First, the start address of the opening time data 1 table or the opening time data 2 table is set in the HL register. Which table the start address is set depends on whether or not the value of the time selection flag (R_TMR_FLG) is 0.
The time selection flag is "0" in the non-time reduction state and "1" in the time reduction state. Here, it is assumed that the opening time data 1 table is set because it is in the non-time shortened state.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an opening time data 1 table.
Two-byte timer values are lined up in the opening time data 1 table (defined by DW).

The first "D_STA_TMR1:" is a label indicating the start address of the opening time data 1 table, and the address matches the top "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1".

The first "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1" is the opening time data, and is the data used when it corresponds to "13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)" in the first special symbol lottery. is there. For example, the value of "10.000" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, the value of "3.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, the value of "8.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to "4 round jackpot (4 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, the value of "8.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST2" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round big hit (7 round normal symbol 1)". For example, the value of "5.000" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST2".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)". For example, the value of "3.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation symbol 3)". For example, the value of "3.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "10 round jackpot (10 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, the value of "3.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3" is the opening time data, which is the data used when the second special symbol lottery corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)". For example, the value of "3.500" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3".

The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST5" is the opening time data, which is the data used when it corresponds to the "small hit" in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value of "7,000" is stored in "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST5".

The opening time data 2 table is a table in which the opening time is set for each winning symbol in a short time, and the value of the opening time data is different from that of the opening time data 1 table, but the table configuration is the opening time data 1. Since it is the same as the table, the contents are omitted.

Then, by setting the start address of such an opening time data 1 table as an argument of the word data selection process, the first preparation for calling the word data selection process is completed (one of the two arguments). The setting of the argument of is completed).

Subsequently, the symbol offset acquisition process is called in FIG. 50 (1). The details of the symbol offset acquisition process are omitted, but for example, "A register = 0 for a 13-round jackpot of the first special symbol 1" and "A register = 1 for a 16-round jackpot of the first special symbol". , "A register = 2 if the jackpot is 7 rounds of the first special symbol", and the value of the symbol offset according to the type of jackpot is set in the A register. As a result, the second preparation for calling the word data selection process is completed (the setting of the other argument of the two arguments is completed).

Then, the word data selection process is called in FIG. 50 (2).
As a result, the opening time (the production waiting time at the start of the big hit) is set in the HL register. This is stored in RAM (RWM) as it is.
The above is an example of the caller of the word data selection process.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a program (embodiment) for byte data selection processing.

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, the selection offset (for example, symbol offset) is set in the A register, and the selection address (for example, the start address or opening of the opening time data 1 table) is set in the HL register. The start address of the time data 2 table) is set.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller. The lower byte value of the selection result data (the lower 8 bytes of the opening time data) is set in the A register, and the HL register is set. The selection result data (16-bit data of the opening time) is set.
The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers and DE registers.

The first "ADDWB HL, A" and the next "ADDWB HL, A" are processes in which the selection offset is added twice to the selected address, the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register, and one more. The value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

For example, it is assumed that the start address of the opening time data 1 table is "address 1000".
When the value of the A register (value of the symbol offset) is "0", the value of the HL register is "1000 (= 1000 + 0 + 0)".
When the value of the A register (value of the symbol offset) is "1", the value of the HL register is "1002 (= 1000 + 1 + 1)".
In this way, the reason why the value of the A register is added twice is that the target data to be acquired is composed of 2 bytes.

The next "LD HL, (HL)" is a process of loading the selection result data, and loads the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register into the HL register.

The next "LD A, L" is a process of setting the lower byte value of the selection result data, and loads the data of the L register into the A register.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
The word data selection process is called with the start address (HL register value) and symbol offset value (A register value) of the data table set, and the value of specific data (2 bytes) in the table is set to the HL register. Overwrite to.

Further, in the word data selection process, the lower byte of the 2-byte data is overwritten in the A register. This process does not have to be executed if necessary. The reason for executing this process is to save the trouble of dividing by the caller (the process of dividing) when the 2-byte data is a pair of one-byte data and another 1-byte data. is there.

In the word data selection process, an instruction (LD HL, (HL) instruction) for loading data at an address indicated by a pair register (HL register) in which two 8-bit registers are paired into the same pair register (HL register). 2 bytes of data (word data) are extracted in a short processing time.

[Summary of word data selection process]
In this way, the word data selection process (specified data acquisition module) converts the specified data (opening time data) stored in the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) of the specified number of bits (16 bits) into the specified register (opening time data). A module that acquires specified data (opening time data) from a data table (opening time data 1 table) in which specified data is stored using load instructions (LD HL, (HL) instructions) to be loaded into the HL register). is there. The main control device 70 includes a word data selection process (specified data acquisition module).

Further, in the word data selection process, an addition instruction (ADDWB instruction) that adds the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) to the data of the predetermined register (A register) and the data of the specified register (HL register) with one instruction. ) Is used for calculation.

Further, the word data selection process calculates the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) by executing the addition instruction (ADDWB instruction) a plurality of times in succession.

Furthermore, in the word data selection process, the symbol offset value (difference value) is set in the predetermined register (A register) and the start address of the data table is set in the specified register (HL register) as an argument. Called by.

Further, in the word data selection process, as a return value, data having a predetermined number of bits lower than the specified data (lower 8 bits of the selection result data) is set in the specified register (A register), and the specified register (HL register) is set. Set the default data (16 bits of selection result data).

Then, the word data selection process basically converts the data belonging to the predetermined classification received as an argument into the data belonging to another classification different from the predetermined classification.

More specifically, the word data selection process converts the data indicating the type of winning received as an argument (data relating to the winning symbol) into data relating to the operation of the special electric accessory (data relating to the opening time).

The word data selection process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of word data selection processing.
The word data selection process of the comparative example is a program arranged in the restart area, but it does not fit in 8 bytes, and the program is divided into a first half part and a second half part.

The first "PUSH DE" is a process of saving the DE register.
The next "LD E, A" is a process of setting the selection offset.
The next "LD D, 0" is a process of loading 0 into the D register.
The next "ADD HL, DE" and the next "ADD HL, DE" are processes in which the selection offset is added twice to the selection address and the selection result data storage address is calculated.
The next "JR WORDSEL_10" is a process of jumping to another location (WORDSEL_10: (label)) in order to secure a restart area. This completes the processing of the first half. The following is the processing of the latter half.

The next "LDA, (HL)" is a process of loading the low-order byte value of the selection result data.
The next "INC HL" is a process of setting the high-order byte storage address of the selection result data.
The next "LDH, (HL)" is a process of setting selection result data.
The next "LD L, A" is a process of loading the data of the A register into the L register.
The next "POP DE" is a process of returning the value of the DE register.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

In the comparative example program, the program capacity was increased because there was no idea of storing the data of the address indicated by the HL register in the HL register.
On the other hand, in the program example of the present embodiment, word data is acquired using a new idea of using the "LD HL, (HL) instruction" that stores the data of the address indicated by the HL register in the HL register, and the program capacity is obtained. Is being reduced.

In the program of the embodiment, "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte", "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte", and "LD HL, (HL)" is "2 bytes". "LD A, L" is "1 byte", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "6 bytes".

On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, "PUSH DE" is "1 byte", "LD E, A" is "1 byte", "LD D, 0" is "2 bytes", and "ADD". "HL, DE" is "1 byte", "ADD HL, DE" is "1 byte", "JR WORDSEL_10" is "2 bytes", and "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte". , "INC HL" is "1 byte", "LD H, (HL)" is "1 byte", "LD L, A" is "1 byte", and "POP DE" Is "1 byte", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "14 bytes".

When the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by "8 bytes".
Further, when the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the processing time of the module can be reduced by 32.4 to 37.5%.

As described above, as for the used area, the program of the comparative example used 8 bytes of the RST area and 6 bytes of the general area, but the program of the embodiment uses only 8 bytes of the RST area. Therefore, it is possible to realize a capacity reduction of 6 bytes.
Further, regarding the processing time, since the program of the comparative example has 72 states and the program of the embodiment has 36 states, an improvement of 50% can be realized.
As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be made more stable than before.

[Dynamic port output processing]
Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14) executed in the interrupt management process. The dynamic port output processing includes special symbol display setting processing (step S1200), normal symbol display setting processing (step S1210), status display setting processing (step S1220), working memory display setting processing (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability variation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a1 to 38a5 in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a1 to 38a5 based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a1 to 38a5 corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a1 representing "4 rounds (4R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "7 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a2 indicating "7 rounds (7R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a3 indicating "10 rounds (10R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "13 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a4 indicating "13 rounds (13R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a5 indicating "16 rounds (16R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot start process (step S5250), and the jackpot opening / closing operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5300), jackpot closing process (step S5400), and jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the jackpot start process (step S5250). Select. Further, if the big hit start process (step S5250) is completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation. If the process is completed, the big hit opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing (the next jump destination). Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the winning opening (the number of opening for each round and the opening time for each round), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. Select the number of winnings) and the ending time. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 28. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 29). Specifically, if "4 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 4. Further, if "7 rounds normal symbol 1" and "7 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 7. Further, if "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10. Furthermore, if "13 rounds normal symbol 1" and "13 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 13. Then, if "16 rounds probability variation symbols 1 to 3" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot opening timer based on the operation pattern of the jackpot opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer, the opening time is sufficient so that the ball can easily enter the big winning opening during one opening. (For example, the time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer, the opening time hardly occurs (it becomes difficult) even if it is not impossible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. ) It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot time interval timer based on the operation pattern of the jackpot opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the big hit.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot start process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

[Start processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot start processing. This process is for controlling the opening time (start time) at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot start time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the value of the special game timer (big hit start time timer) with the passage of time (every time this module is called). The special game timer (big hit start time timer) may be updated by the timer update process.

Step S5262: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot start time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot start time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot start time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

After that, when the value of the jackpot start time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot start time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the process of step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing (FIG. 55).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 27, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 56) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5308. To execute.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 56) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 55) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the release count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the "number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. If such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401a: The main control CPU 72 executes the inter-round interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value of the inter-round interval time in the inter-round interval timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) as the time elapses.

Step S5401b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time between rounds has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the inter-round interval timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inter-round interval time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

After that, when the value of the inter-round interval timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inter-round interval time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the process of step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 55). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a big hit again, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the special symbol hit flag. As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 29) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 10000 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cut counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is not set for the high-probability state, it hardly occurs when the high-probability state returns to the low-probability state without obtaining the winning result (so-called loop-type probabilistic machine). .. If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 29) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 10000 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 10000 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. If is not set, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the special symbol hit flag is reset or the major role ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) in the special game management process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) is selected. If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, the opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and in such an opening time, a prize is hardly generated in the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 62) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 62).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 61). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 62). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 61).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 61). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set number of opening (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 61).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the value of the special symbol hit flag, and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) in the special game management process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Normal game management process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal game management process.

Step S7000: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the normal game management phase. In this process, the normal game management phase is set in the A register. The values of the normal game management phase are as follows.

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (inside the key brackets) of the normal game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (7) of the game corresponding to the normal symbol, for example, as follows.
(1) Normal symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol fluctuation display status: "01H"
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display status: "02H"
(4) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) State before opening the winning opening: "03H"
(5) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Winning opening open control state: "04H"
(6) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) Winning opening end Weight state: "05H"

The "normal symbol change waiting state" is a state in which the normal symbol changes when there is a hold. The "normal symbol variation display state" is a state in which the normal symbol is fluctuating. The "normal symbol stop symbol display state" is a state in which the change of the normal symbol is completed and the lottery result is being displayed. The "state before the release of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory" is a state in which the ordinary electric accessory is won by lottery and waits for the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening of the electric chew). The "normal electric accessory winning opening release control state" is a state in which the ordinary electric accessory is operating. The "normal electric accessory winning opening end weight state" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory has been completed.

Step S7002: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the normal game jump table. In this process, the start address of the normal game jump table is set in the HL register. In the normal game jump table, the start addresses of the six modules related to the normal symbols are listed in order.

Step S7004: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of executing the word data selection process. In this process, the start address of the module to be called is set in the HL register based on the preset HL register (address of the normal game jump table) and the A register (value of the normal game management phase).

Step S7006: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the normal game timer. In this process, a normal game timer (a timer for which the time to stay in the current state is set) is set in the DE register.

Step S7008: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling a target module related to a normal game. In this process, a process of calling any of the set six types of modules is executed. The target module is a module corresponding to the value of the normal game management phase. For example, if the value of the normal game management phase is "00H", the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the normal symbol change preprocessing. If the value of the normal game management phase is "01H", the process of calling the normal symbol changing process is executed, and if the value of the normal game management phase is "02H", the process of calling the normal symbol stop display process is executed. Execute.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 14).

[Normal symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal symbol change preprocessing.

Step S7010: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal game management process (FIG. 66). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S7012.

Step S7012: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random number (ordinary symbol hit determination random number) stored in the random number storage area (ordinary symbol hit determination random number storage 1) of the RAM 76, and stores this as, for example, the ordinary symbol hit determination random number storage 0. Save in (the area). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers from the first section (normal symbol hit determination random number storage 1), and the remaining random numbers (ordinary symbol hit decision random number storage 2 to 4). ) Are moved (shifted) one by one to the previous section (normally determined random number storage 1 to 3 per symbol). The random number stored in the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0 is used for the winning / failing lottery in the subsequent normal symbol hit determination processing.

Step S7014: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S7016: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol stop symbol number determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the normal symbol stop symbol number according to the result. The main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the normal symbol display device 33 in the case of loss, and determines the hit stop symbol number by the normal symbol display device 33 in the case of winning.

Step S7018: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol variation time setting process. The fluctuation time is determined in consideration of the game state and the result of winning or failing the normal symbol lottery. The fluctuation time may be different from the time of winning and the time of deviation, or may be a common fluctuation time.

Step S7020: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the ram set table at the start of the normal symbol variation.

Step S7022: The main control CPU 72 executes the ram set process.
By executing the processes of step S7020 and step S7022, the RAM setting and the command generation / transmission process required at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol are executed.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal game management processing (FIG. 66).

[Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal symbol hit determination process.

Step S7020: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the special symbol state flag. The value of the special symbol state flag is the value of the state offset. The special symbol state flag is set to "0" when the winning probability of the normal symbol is low (in the non-time shortened state), and when the winning probability of the normal symbol is high (in the time shortened state). If there is), it becomes "1". The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special symbol state flag when the game state is switched.

Step S7022: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the start address of the normal symbol hit determination selection table.

Step S7024: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of executing the double byte selection process.

Step S7026: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading (loading into the D register) the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0.

Step S7028: The main control CPU 72 executes the word data determination process. By this process, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit or a miss.

The specific processing contents of the word data judgment processing are omitted, but briefly, first, the contents (lower limit value) of the data table indicated by the address stored in the HL register and the contents of the data table stored in the D register are stored. The process of comparing with the existing random number value is executed, and then the process of adding 1 to the value of the HL register and comparing the upper limit value with the random number value is executed. Then, if it is in the hit range, it becomes "C register = 1", and if it is not in the hit range, it becomes "C register = 0". Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether or not the normal symbol lottery is successful based on the value of the "C register".

Step S7030: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the normal symbol hit information [01H]. By this process, the value at the time of winning is tentatively set.

Step S7032: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining whether or not the random number stored in the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0 is within the hit range. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not “C register = 1”.

As a result, when it is determined that the random number stored in the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0 is within the hit range, that is, when it is confirmed that "C register = 1" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes step S7036. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the random number stored in the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0 is within the hit range, that is, when it is confirmed that "C register = 0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S7034.

Step S7034: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the normal symbol deviation information [00H]. By this process, the situation where the value at the time of winning is tentatively set is canceled.

Step S7036: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the normal symbol hit information [01H] or the normal symbol loss information [00H] in the normal symbol hit flag. The value of the normal symbol hit flag is used in the subsequent normal game management process to determine whether or not the player has won.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 67).

[Double byte selection process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the double byte selection process.

Step S7030: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the selection offset to the selection address.

Step S7032: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the offset data indicated by the addition result address.

Step S7034: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding offset data to the addition result address.

When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a program for normal symbol hit determination processing.
In this program, the process of selecting the normal symbol hit determination table is executed by the instructions of the first three lines, and the ordinary symbol hit determination process is executed by the instructions of the fourth and subsequent lines.

The first "LDQ A, (LOW R_ZTN_FLG)" is a process of loading the special symbol state flag (state offset), and loads the value of the special symbol state flag (R_ZTN_FLG) into the A register.

The next "LD HL, D_JDG_FHT" is a process of setting the address of the normal symbol hit judgment selection table, and loads the start address of the normal symbol hit judgment selection table into the HL register.

The next "RST DBLBYTE" is a process of calling the double-byte selection process, and calls the double-byte selection process arranged in the restart area.

The next "LDQ DE, (LOW R_MFZ_ATA_0)" is a process of loading the random numbers stored in the normal symbol-per-determined random number storage 0, and the ordinary symbol-per-determined random number stored in the ordinary symbol-per-determined random number storage 0. Is loaded into the DE register.

The next "CALLF WORDJDG" is a process of calling a word data determination process.

The next "LDA, @FZ__HIT" is a process of setting the normal symbol hit information [01H], and loads the value (01H) of "@FZ__HIT" into the A register.

The next "JRC, FATAJDG_10" is a process of branching to "FATAJDG_10: (label)" if the random number stored in the normal symbol hit determination random number storage 0 is within the hit range.

The next "XOR A" is a process of setting the normal symbol deviation information [00H], and "00H" is set in the A register. Here, when 0 is set in the A register, the XOR instruction is used instead of the LD instruction because the XOR instruction can reduce the program capacity (XOR instruction = 1 byte, LD instruction = 2 bytes).

The next "LDQ (LOW R_FZ__HIT), A" is a process of saving to the normal symbol per flag (R_FZ__HIT), and loads the value of the A register into the normal symbol per flag (R_FZ__HIT).

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
Here, a method of using the double-byte selection process in the normal symbol hit determination process will be described. In this process, the winning range is different depending on whether the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low (non-time shortened state) or the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high (time shortened state). It is judged whether or not the symbol lottery is successful.

The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low in the non-time shortened state (which may include during big hits and latent), which is the normal state, and high in the time shortened state (during probability fluctuation and during time saving). Become.

In FIG. 70 (1), the special symbol selection flag is read and used as an offset value (state offset).
The special symbol state flag represents a time saving state, and when the value of the special symbol state flag is "0", the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low, and the value of the special symbol state flag is "1". In that case, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is high.

In FIG. 70 (2), the start address of the data table (ordinary symbol hit judgment selection table) summarizing the offsets to the lottery data table for each state is set.

In FIG. 70 (3), the double-byte selection process is called to acquire the start address of the target table (ordinary symbol low probability hourly hit determination table or ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table).

Then, in the subsequent programs, the winning determination of the normal symbol lottery is executed based on the start address of the target table.

Here, in the present embodiment, two tables according to the game state are prepared as the tables used for the normal symbol hit determination process. The two tables are as follows.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table and a normal symbol high probability hourly hit determination table.

Two 2-byte data are arranged side by side in the normal symbol low-probability hourly judgment table (defined by DW).

The first "D_JDG_FHT_L:" is a label indicating a normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table, and the address matches the top "DW @ FHT_BTM".

The first "DW @ FHT_BTM" is the lower limit value per normal symbol, and indicates the lower limit value of winning at the time of low probability (non-time shortened state). For example, the value of "0100H (1)" is stored in "DW @ FHT_BTM". Note that "01" is a lower value and "00" is a higher value.

The next "DW @ FHT_TOP_L" is an upper limit value per normal symbol, and indicates an upper limit value of winning at a low probability (non-time shortened state). For example, the value of "0100H (1)" is stored in "DW @ FHT_TOP_L".
Since the lower limit value and the upper limit value are the same value, the winner is won only when the random number is 1.

Two 2-byte data are arranged side by side in the normal symbol high-probability hourly judgment table (defined by DW).

The first "D_JDG_FHT_H:" is a label indicating a normal symbol high probability hourly hit determination table, and the address matches the top "DW @ FHT_BTM".

The first "DW @ FHT_BTM" is the lower limit value per normal symbol, and indicates the lower limit value of winning at the time of high probability (time shortened state). For example, the value of "0100H (1)" is stored in "DW @ FHT_BTM". This value is common to the low probability.

The next "DW @ FHT_TOP_H" is an upper limit value per normal symbol, and indicates an upper limit value of winning at a high probability (time shortened state). For example, the value of "FFFFH (65535)" is stored in "DW @FHT_TOP_H".

Then, apart from these two tables, a table that summarizes the offsets of the two tables to the start address is prepared. In the program, the table summarizing the offsets is arranged immediately before the above-mentioned two tables (ordinary symbol low probability hourly hit determination table and ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table).

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination selection table.

In the normal symbol hit judgment selection table, two 1-byte data are arranged side by side (defined in the DB).

The first "DB D_JDG_FHT_L- $" is an offset to the normal symbol low probability hourly judgment table, and is data used when the normal symbol lottery is executed in a non-time shortened state. For example, the value of "02" is stored in "DB D_JDG_FHT_L- $ (offset to the normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table)".

The next "DB D_JDG_FHT_H- $" is an offset to the normal symbol high probability hourly hit determination table, and is data used when the normal symbol lottery is executed in a time-reduced state. For example, the value of "05" is stored in "DB D_JDG_FHT_H- $".

In addition, "D_JDG_FHT_L" indicates the start address of the normal symbol low probability hourly hit judgment table, "D_JDG_FHT_H" indicates the start address of the normal symbol high probability time hit judgment table, and "$" indicates "$". Indicates the address (current address) of the point where "" is described.

Such a method (a method using a table configuration as described above) cannot cope with "when individual data is large or when the offset value is not enough with 255 (hexadecimal FF)", but it is used in a gaming machine. Since many program data tables are small, they can be used in many cases.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a program (embodiment) for double-byte selection processing.

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, the selection offset (for example, state offset) is set in the A register, and the selection address (for example, the start address of the normal symbol hit judgment selection table) is set in the HL register. Is set.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller, and the selection result address (normal symbol low probability hourly hit judgment table start address or normal symbol high probability hourly hit judgment) is stored in the HL register. Table start address) is set.

The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers and DE registers.

The first "ADDWB HL, A" is a process of adding the selection offset to the selected address, and the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

The next "LD A, (HL)" is a process of adding offset data to the addition result address, and adds the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register to the data of the A register.

The next "ADDWB HL, A" is a process of adding offset data to the addition result address, and the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
The double byte selection process is called with the start address (HL register) of the data table in which the second offsets are arranged and the first offset value (state offset, A register) set. After adding the first offset value (A register) to the start address (HL register) of the data table, the second offset value stored in the address indicated by the added value is further added to obtain the target data table. You can get the start address of.
The double-byte selection process is used in the gaming machine to reduce the amount of program data used.

The double-byte selection process is used, for example, when one is selected from a plurality of existing tables and it is desired to acquire the start address of the selected table.

The double byte selection process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

Here, the double-byte selection processing program can also be modified as follows.
(1st line of the program) "RST BYTESEL"
This process is a process that calls the byte data selection process.
(2nd line of program) "ADDWB HL, A"
This process is a process of adding the lower byte of the HL register and the byte of the A register.
(3rd line of the program) "RET"
This process is a process of returning to the caller.

The double-byte selection processing program of the modified example can execute the same processing content as that of the embodiment, and although the improvement effect of the execution time is not obtained as much as that of the embodiment, the execution time is shorter than that of the program of the comparative example. Moreover, the capacity of the program can be suppressed as compared with the program of the embodiment.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of a normal symbol hit determination selection table, a normal symbol low probability time hit determination table, and a normal symbol high probability time hit determination table.

In the present embodiment, with respect to the table used for the lottery of the ordinary game, each of the three tables (ordinary symbol hit judgment selection table, ordinary symbol low probability hit judgment table and normal symbol high probability time hit judgment table) is arranged as follows. Has been done. The address value is just an example.

A normal symbol hit determination selection table (D_JDG_FHT) summarizing the second offset values is arranged at addresses 1200H to 1201H.

A normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table (D_JDG_FHT_L) is arranged at addresses 1202H to 1205H.

A normal symbol high probability hourly hit determination table (D_JDG_FHT_H) is arranged at addresses 1206H to 1209H.

D_JDG_FHT (label) is arranged at the address 1200H, "02" is stored as data, and the content of the data is offset (02H =) to the address (D_JDG_FHT_L) of the judgment table at the time of low probability (non-time shortened state). 1202H-1200H) (second offset used at low probability).

"05" is stored as data in the address 1201H, and the content of the data is an offset (05H = 1206H-1201H) to the address (D_JDG_FHT_H) of the determination table at the time of high probability (time shortened state) (high probability). Second offset sometimes used).

D_JDG_FHT_L (label) is arranged at address 1202H, "0100" is stored at addresses 1202H and 1203H as data, and the content of the data is the lower limit value (1) at the time of low probability.

"0100" is stored as data at addresses 1204H and 1205H, and the content of the data becomes the hit upper limit value (1) at the time of low probability.

D_JDG_FHT_H (label) is arranged at address 1206H, "0100" is stored at addresses 1206H and 1207H as data, and the content of the data is the lower limit value (1) at the time of high probability.

"FFFF" is stored as data at addresses 1208H and 1209H, and the content of the data is a hit upper limit value (65535) at the time of high probability.

Then, for example, when it is desired to execute the normal symbol lottery with a high probability (time shortened state), 1200H (the first address of the table summarizing the offset values) is set in the HL register, and 01H is set in the A register. In this state, the double byte selection process (FIG. 73) is called.

In the double byte selection process, in FIG. 73 (1), the value of the A register is first added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes 1201H.

Next, in FIG. 73 (2), the data stored at address 1201H is read into the A register.

Finally, in FIG. 73 (3), the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. The calculation result is 1201H + 5H = 1206H, which is the final HL register value. Then, this value is the start address of the ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table (D_JDG_FHT_H), and the caller refers to the start address of this ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table and wins the ordinary symbol lottery. Execute the judgment.

[Summary of double byte selection process]
In this way, the double byte selection process (address calculation module) is performed on the first addition value data (state offset value, special symbol state flag value) of the first register (A register) and the second register (HL register). Add the basic address data (the start address of the normal symbol hit judgment selection table) and add the first address data (second addition value data (normal symbol low probability time hit judgment table offset to the start address or normal symbol high probability time) Calculate the data of the address where the hit judgment table offset to the start address) is stored, load the second addition value data (second offset) stored at the address indicated by the first address data, and load it. The loaded second addition value data is added to the first address data to calculate the second address data (the start address of the normal symbol low probability time hit determination table or the start address of the normal symbol high probability time hit determination table). The main control device 70 includes a double-byte selection process (address calculation module).

Further, in the double byte selection process, the first address data or the second address is used by using an addition instruction that adds the data of the first register (A register) and the data of the second register (HL register) with one instruction. Calculate the data.

Further, in the double byte selection process, a difference value (state offset, first offset) is set in the first register (A register) as an argument, and a data table (ordinary symbol) is set in the second register (HL register). It is called with the start address of the hit judgment selection table) set.

Furthermore, in the double byte selection process, the second address data (the start address of the normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table or the start address of the ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table) is set as the return value.

Then, the double byte selection process is stored in a plurality of data tables (a data table in which a normal symbol hit judgment selection table, a normal symbol low probability time hit judgment table, and a normal symbol high probability time hit judgment table are used as one table). Select one table from the tables of, and calculate the start address of the selected one table (the start address of the normal symbol low probability time hit judgment table or the start address of the normal symbol high probability time hit judgment table). Execute.

In addition, the data table referred to by the double-byte selection process (a data table that combines a normal symbol hit judgment selection table, a normal symbol low probability hit judgment table, and a normal symbol high probability hit judgment table as one table) can be used as an argument. The basic address of the received HL register is the start address, and the second addition value data (offset to the start address of the normal symbol low probability time hit judgment table or offset to the start address of the normal symbol high probability time hit judgment table) This is a table in which the second address data (the start address of the normal symbol low probability hourly hit determination table or the start address of the ordinary symbol high probability hourly hit determination table) is arranged next to.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a double-byte selection processing program (comparative example).
The double byte selection process in the comparative example is a process in which the byte data selection process is called twice and then returned. The process of this part is 3 bytes, but the remaining 5 bytes which would normally be a free area Is used as the latter half of another module (state offset acquisition process: CONDOFS).

The first "RST BYTESEL" is a process of calling a byte data selection process.
The next "RST BYTESEL" is a process of calling the byte data selection process.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

The next "CONDOFS_10:" is a label indicating the jump destination of the latter half of the state offset acquisition process.
The next "XOR H" is a process of exclusive-ORing the special symbol state flag (flag indicating whether or not the time is shortened) and the special symbol probability state flag (flag indicating whether or not it is probable).
The next "ADD A, H" and the next "ADD A, H" are processes for calculating the state offset.
The next "POP HL" is a process of returning the HL register.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

In the comparative example program, the program capacity was increased because there was no idea that the process was completed in the double-byte selection process and the program of another module was not described.

On the other hand, in the program example of the present embodiment, the program capacity of the double-byte selection process is reduced by using a new idea that the process is completed in the double-byte selection process and the program of another module is not described. ing. Further, in the program example of the present embodiment, the call of the byte data selection process is not executed in order to give priority to the operation speed.

In the program of the embodiment, "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte", "LD A, (HL)" is "1 byte", and "ADDWB HL, A" is "1 byte". "RET" is "1 byte" and the total program capacity is "4 bytes".

On the other hand, in the part corresponding to the program of the embodiment in the program of the comparative example, "RST BYTESEL" is "1 byte", "RST BYTESEL" is "1 byte", and "RET" is "1 byte". Yes, the total program capacity is "3 bytes".

Then, when the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is increased by "1 byte".
However, when the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the required number of states of the embodiment is 25 states, the required number of states of the comparative example is 80 states, and the processing speed (program execution speed) is significantly increased (68). .75%) Can be improved.

As described above, in the double-byte selection process of the embodiment, the latter half of the state offset acquisition process (CONDOFS) is not arranged in the free area of the RST area. This is because the state offset acquisition process (CONDOFS) is used less frequently and is no longer placed in the RST area, and the 8-byte limit on the RST area has been removed.

[Winning frequency abnormality error judgment processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the winning frequency abnormality error determination process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

The winning frequency abnormality error determination process is a process called in the state management process (S210 in FIG. 14). When executing the word counter subtraction process in the winning frequency abnormality error judgment processing, for example, in order to count the number of timer interrupts corresponding to one minute when judging "an error if there are N or more prizes in one minute". use.

Step S7100: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the winning frequency abnormality error counter. The winning frequency abnormality error counter is a variable that counts the number of winnings that result in abnormal winning.

Step S7102: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

Step S7104: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detection balls. The value of the number of balls for which the winning frequency abnormality error is detected is set in advance such as a period constant (for example, 5 balls).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detection balls (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S7116.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detection balls (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S7106.

Step S7106: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

Step S7108: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

Step S7110: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the security setting process. The content of the security setting process is omitted, but briefly, security-related processes (subcommand generation / transmission processing, security timer setting processing, error state setting / cancellation processing, etc.) are executed.

Step S7112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of returning the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

Step S7114: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of returning the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7120.

Step S7116: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the word counter subtraction process. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S7118: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0. Although not particularly shown, the initial value (for example, 1 minute) of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer may be set in advance in the upper module or may be set in this module.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0 (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is 0, the main control CPU 72 performs step S7120. Execute.

Step S7120: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

Step S7122: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the winning opening winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value in the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer. By executing this process, the winning opening winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value will be reset.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Word counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the word counter subtraction process.
The word counter subtraction process is a process for handling a counter value that does not fit in one byte (for example, a two-byte counter value (word counter, word data)).

Step S7200: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the word data before subtraction is 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 0 (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7202.

Step S7202: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the word data.

Step S7204: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the word data after subtraction is not 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the word data after subtraction is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the word data after subtraction is not 0 (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the word data after subtraction is 0, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7206.

Step S7206: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the carry flag.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a program for determining a winning frequency abnormality error.

In the figure, the first three instructions correspond to the winning frequency abnormality error counter confirmation process. The next six instructions correspond to processing when a winning frequency abnormality error occurs. The following two instructions correspond to the winning frequency abnormality monitoring timer confirmation process. The last two instructions correspond to the winning frequency abnormality error-related setting processing.

The first "LDA, (BC)" is a process of loading the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and loads the data stored in the address indicated by the BC register into the A register. The value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is stored in the address indicated by the BC register. The value of the BC register is set in the upper module.

The next "CP D" is a process of confirming the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and compares the value indicated by the D register with the value indicated by the A register. If the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detection balls (if A <D), the carry flag (C) is set.

The next "JRC, NHI_CHK_10" is a process of branching if the number of winning frequency abnormal error detection balls is less than the number of balls, and if the carry flag (C) is set, the process jumps to "NHI_CHK_10: (label)".

The next "PUSH BC" is a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and saves the value of the BC register.

The next "PUSH HL" is a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer, and saves the value of the HL register.

The next "RST SEC_SET" is a process of calling the security setting process arranged in the restart area.

The next "POP HL" is a process of returning the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

The next "POP BC" is a process of returning the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

The next "JR NHI_CHK_20" is a process of jumping to "NHI_CHK_20: (label)".

The next "CALLF WORDDEC" is a process of calling the word counter subtraction process.

The next "RET NTZ" is a process of returning if the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0, and returns to the caller if the second zero flag is not 0. The second zero flag is set as the judgment target when the program of the second example of the following word counter subtraction process is adopted, and the program of the first example of the following word counter subtraction process is adopted. If so, the zero flag is used for judgment.

The next "CLR (BC)" is a process of clearing the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and clears the data stored in the address indicated by the BC register.

The next "LDW (HL), @ TMR_CHK_PZF" is a winning opening in the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer. The winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value is saved, and the winning opening is added to the data stored in the address indicated by the BC register. The winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value (@TMR_CHK_PZF, for example, the value corresponding to 1 minute) is loaded.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
Here, a method of using the word counter subtraction process in the winning frequency abnormality error determination process will be described.
The winning frequency abnormality error determination process is one of the processes executed in the timer interrupt process (state management process).

When the winning frequency abnormality error determination process is called, the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer and the like are set in advance in each register (input register).
The number of timer interrupts corresponding to one minute is set in advance in the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer. Each time the timer is interrupted, the word counter subtraction process is called in FIG. 78 (1), and the value is subtracted. If one minute has not passed, the caller is returned in (2) in FIG. 78. When 1 minute has passed, or when a winning frequency abnormality error occurs, the counter for counting the number of winnings is cleared in FIG. 78 (3), and the timer for 1 minute is reset in FIG. 78 (4).
The above is an example of the caller of the word counter subtraction process.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a program for word counter subtraction processing (first example).

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the ram address to be subtracted is set in the HL register.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller. The update result flag is set in the zero flag of the F register, and the update result flag is set in the carry flag of the F register.

The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers and HL registers.

The first "JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is a process of branching if the word data before subtraction is 0, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer). ) Is 0, the zero flag (Z) is set, and if the zero flag is set, the process jumps to "WORDDEC_99: (label)".

The next "DECW (HL)" is a process of subtracting word data, and subtracts 1 from the data (winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer) stored in the address indicated by the HL register.

The next "JTW NZ, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is a process of returning if the word data after subtraction is not 0.

The next "SCF" is a process of setting a carry flag.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
The word counter subtraction process is a module that does nothing if the 2-byte RWM value specified in the HL register is 0 (0000H), and subtracts 1 by (0001H to FFFFH) if it is not 0. When the value after subtraction changes from 1 (0001H) to 0 (0000H), a carry flag is set as a flag indicating that.

The "JTW instruction" used in (1) and (3) in FIG. 79 is an instruction that branches depending on whether or not the 16-bit data is 0.
In the program instruction, there is no instruction that returns depending on whether or not the 16-bit data is 0. If you want to do so, it is necessary to branch by the "JTW instruction" and execute the return instruction at the branch destination as in this program example.

In FIG. 79 (1), the "JTW instruction" is used to determine whether or not the 16-bit value written in the RWM (and the next RWM) specified by the HL register is 0.

Then, if the value of the word data is 0, the zero flag is set, and if not, the zero flag is reset. Also, the carry flag is always reset. If the zero flag is set, the process proceeds to the label "WORDDEC_99", and if it is reset, the process proceeds to the next instruction.

In the “DECW (HL)” instruction in FIG. 79 (2), 1 is subtracted from the 16-bit value written in the RWM (and the next RWM) specified by the HL register. If the result of the subtraction is 0, the second zero flag is set, and if not, the second zero flag is reset. The values of the zero flag and the carry flag do not change regardless of the result.

In the module of the first example, a zero flag is set for whether or not the 16-bit value is 0, and the value is returned to the caller. In order to realize this, in FIG. 79 (3), the "JTW instruction" is executed again, and whether or not the 16-bit value is 0 is reflected in the zero flag.
Then, if the updated 16-bit value is not 0, the zero flag is reset and the process shifts to "WORDDEC_99". If the updated 16-bit value is 0, the zero flag is set and the process proceeds to the next instruction.

After all, only when the 16-bit value changes from 1 to 0, the "SCF instruction" shown in FIG. 79 (4) is executed and the carry flag is set. In other cases, the carry flag is reset to the caller by the "JTW instruction" in (1) or (3) in FIG. 79.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a program for word counter subtraction processing (second example).

The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the ram address to be subtracted is set in the HL register.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and referenced by the caller. The update result flag is set in the second zero flag of the F register, and the update result flag is set in the carry flag of the F register. The flag.

The protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are BC registers and HL registers.

The first "JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is a process of branching if the word data before subtraction is 0, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer). ) Is 0, the zero flag (Z) is set, and if the zero flag is set, the process jumps to "WORDDEC_99: (label)".

The next "DECW (HL)" is a process of subtracting word data, and subtracts 1 from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer).

The next "RET NTZ" is a process of returning if the word data after subtraction is not 0. This process is different from the program of the first example.

The next "SCF" is a process of setting a carry flag.

The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

[Explanation of the program]
In FIG. 80 (1), it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data indicated by the HL register is 0000H. Internally, 2-byte data is compared with 0000H, and the carry flag is reset regardless of the value of the data. The zero flag is set only when the value of the 2-byte data is 0000H, the jump is made to "WORDDEC_99", and the data returns to the caller as it is. I would like to say "return if the value of 2-byte data is 0000H", but there is no such instruction.
Further, in the JTW instruction, the second zero flag (TZ) changes in the same manner as the zero flag (Z). Therefore, when the value of the 2-byte data is 0000H, the data returns to the caller with the second zero flag set.

On the other hand, if the 2-byte data is not 0000H, the process proceeds to (2) in FIG. 80 as it is.
In FIG. 80 (2), 1 is subtracted from the 2-byte data. In this instruction, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change, but the second zero flag changes. If the 2-byte data changes from 0001H to 0000H, the second zero flag is set, otherwise the second zero flag is reset.

In FIG. 80 (3), the second zero flag is confirmed, and if it is reset, it returns to the caller. Only when the 2-byte data changes from 0001H to 0000H, the process proceeds to (4) in FIG. 80, and the carry flag is set by the "SCF instruction".

[Comparison between the first example and the second example]
In the program of the second example, the flag (return value) returned to the parent module (calling module) is changed from the zero flag to the second zero flag.
Therefore, the part (3) in FIG. 80 is different from the program of the first example in processing, and is a "RET NTZ" instruction. In FIG. 80 (3), it is determined whether or not to return depending on the content of the second zero flag.
Then, only when the 16-bit value changes from 1 to 0, the carry flag is set in FIG. 80 (4), and in other cases, the parent module is in a state where the carry flag is reset in FIG. 80 (1). Return to.

The word counter subtraction process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the relationship between the RWM value and the flag when the word counter subtraction process is called.

[0000H]
When the value of RWM before subtraction (data indicated by the ram address to be subtracted) is "0000H", the value of RWM after subtraction is "0000H". The second zero flag is set (TZ) and the carry flag is reset (NC).

[0001H]
When the value of RWM before subtraction is "0001H", the value of RWM after subtraction is "0000H". The second zero flag is set (TZ) and the carry flag is set (C).

[0002H]
When the value of RWM before subtraction is "0002H", the value of RWM after subtraction is "0001H". The second zero flag is reset (NTZ) and the carry flag is reset (NC).

[0003H or higher]
When the value of RWM before subtraction is "0003H or more", the value of RWM after subtraction is "a value obtained by subtracting 1 from a value of 0003H or more". The second zero flag is reset (NTZ) and the carry flag is reset (NC).

Here, the second zero flag is a flag different from the zero flag. The second zero flag changes even for an instruction in which the zero flag does not change. For example, when the load instruction (“LDA, 0”) is executed, the zero flag does not change, but the second zero flag is set (changes). Although the second zero flag is convenient, the content of the flag changes even with a simple load instruction. Therefore, after setting the second zero flag, use the second zero flag for judgment without executing other instructions. Is preferable.

[Summary of word counter subtraction processing]
In this way, the word counter subtraction process (arithmetic processing module) performs arithmetic processing (1) on the specified data (data to be subtracted) stored at the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) of the specified number of bits (16 bits). It is a module to be subtracted), and before executing the arithmetic processing, it is judged whether or not the specified data is a special value (0), and if it is a judgment result that it is a special value, a special flag is set. Execute arithmetic processing using a branch instruction (JTW instruction) that sets (zero flag) and executes the process of branching (jumping) to a position where arithmetic processing is not executed when a special flag is set. Determine whether or not to do so. The main control device 70 includes a word counter subtraction process (arithmetic processing module).

Further, in the word counter subtraction process, the arithmetic process is executed by using the arithmetic instruction (DECW instruction) that calculates the word data (specified data) stored at the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) with one instruction. ..

Further, the word counter subtraction process is called with the address of the area in which the specified data is stored set in the specified register (HL register) as an argument.

Furthermore, in the word counter subtraction process, as a return value, a special flag (for example, the zero flag of bit 6 of the F register or the second of bit 5 of the F register) is set in a special register (F register) different from the specified register (HL register). The value of the zero flag) or the value of the special flag (for example, the carry flag of bit 0 of the F register) indicating the result of the arithmetic processing is set.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of the byte counter subtraction process.

The first "PUSH HL" is a process of saving the HL register.
The next "LDE, (HL)" is a process of acquiring low-order byte data from the subtraction target ram.
The next "INC HL" is a process of setting the high-order byte data storage address.
The next "LD D, (HL)" is a process of acquiring high-order byte data from the subtraction target ram.
The next "LD A, E" and "ORD" are processes for confirming the word data before subtraction.
The next "JR Z, WORDDEC_10" is a process of branching if the word data before subtraction is 0.

The next "DEC DE" is a process of subtracting 1 from the word data.
The next "LD (HL), D" is a process of saving the high-order byte of the word data in the subtraction target ram.
The next "DEC HL" is a process of setting the data storage address of the lower byte.
The next "LD (HL), E" is a process of saving the lower byte of the word data in the subtraction target ram.
The next "LD A, E" and "ORD" are processes for confirming the word data after 1 subtraction.
The next "JR NZ, WORDDEC_10" is a process of branching if the word data after 1 subtraction is not 0.
The next "SCF" is a process of setting a carry flag.

The next "WORDDEC_10:" is the label of the jump destination.
The next "POP HL" is a process of returning the HL register.
The next "RET" is a process of returning to the caller.

In the word counter subtraction process of the comparative example, when determining whether the 2-byte data is 0, the logical sum of the upper byte and the lower byte is taken, and the determination is made based on whether the result of the logical sum is 0. The "LD A, E" instruction and the "ORD" instruction are combined to check whether the DE register is 0000H. Further, even after the data is subtracted, it is necessary to return the upper byte and the lower byte separately, which makes the processing longer. Further, regarding whether or not the update result is zero, the zero flag is used because the second zero flag did not exist in the conventional CPU.

In the program of the first example, "JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is "3 bytes", "DECW (HL)" is "2 bytes", and "JTW NZ, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is. "3 bytes", "SCF" is "2 bytes", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "11 bytes".

In the program of the second example, "JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99" is "3 bytes", "DECW (HL)" is "2 bytes", and "RET NTZ" is "1 byte". , "SCF" is "2 bytes", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "9 bytes".

On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, "PUSH HL" is "1 byte", "LD E, (HL)" is "1 byte", "INC HL" is "1 byte", and "LD". "D, (HL)" is "1 byte", "LD A, E" is "1 byte", "ORD" is "1 byte", and "JR Z, WORDDEC_10" is "2 bytes". , "DEC DE" is "1 byte", "LD (HL), D" is "1 byte", "DEC HL" is "1 byte", and "LD (HL), "E" is "1 byte", "LD A, E" is "1 byte", "ORD" is "1 byte", "JR NZ, WORDDEC_10" is "2 bytes", and so on. "SCF" is "2 bytes", "POP HL" is "1 byte", "RET" is "1 byte", and the total program capacity is "20 bytes".

When the first example and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by "9 bytes". Further, when the second example and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by "11 bytes".

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when a winner is obtained in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state" (low probability non-time shortened state). [F1] In the normal mode, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

When the jackpot of [F2] "13 round normal symbol 1" is won in the [F1] normal mode, the jackpot game according to the winning symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F3] coast mode.

[F3] In the coast mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "high probability state" (low probability time shortened state). In the [F3] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F4] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F1] In normal mode, [F5] "16 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round probability variation symbol 2", "7 round probability variation symbol 1", "4 round probability variation symbol 1" When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game according to the winning symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the [F6] fireworks rush.

[F6] In the fireworks rush, the winning probability of the special symbol is the "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "high probability state" (high probability time shortened state). [F6] In the fireworks rush, since the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes are set to 10,000, the fireworks rush will substantially continue until the next big hit.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when a winner is obtained in the second special symbol lottery in the fireworks rush or the coastal mode.

When the jackpot of [G1] "7 round normal symbol 1" is won in [F3] coast mode or [F6] fireworks rush, the jackpot game according to the winning symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, [F3] Shift to coastal mode.

On the other hand, in [F3] coast mode or [F6] fireworks rush, [G2] "16 round probability variation symbol 2", "16 round probability variation symbol 3", "13 round probability variation symbol 3", "10 round probability variation symbol 1" , "7-round probability variation symbol 2" and "7-round probability variation symbol 3" are won, the jackpot game according to the winning symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to [F6] fireworks rush.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 85 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect is performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used) starts the variable display and the time when the stop display (including the fixed stop) is performed. It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 85 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually, for example, "16 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to them (for example, red display color).

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 85 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 due to the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memory image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
FIG. 85 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 85 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed is increased accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 85 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 85 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 85 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIG. 86 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect (super reach effect) executed at the time of a big hit (winning). Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 86, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-variation display area X1 and the in-variation display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 86 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 86 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 86 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 86 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 86 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 86 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 86 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing "heart" figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. .. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 86 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 86 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 86 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol is stopped. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 86 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the subject of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 87 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode that is transferred after the big hit game when "one of the probabilistic symbols" is won. Fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 87 (A): For example, after the big hit game with "one of the probable variation symbols" is completed, the variation display of the special symbol is performed, so that the variation display of the production symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". There is. The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 87 (B): Then, since the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game is completed, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 87 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the result of winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach production is executed and it becomes a big hit.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a mode that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game when "any of the normal symbols" is applicable. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 88 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in "one of the normal symbols" is completed, the variation display of the special symbol is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. ing. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 88 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 88 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, stop display effect, reach effect, notice effect, effect related to the stored image, large role effect, and the like are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), and acoustic drive. The configuration includes subroutines for processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, and a (special symbol) operation memory decrease. Time production command, start opening winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end There are production commands, count cut counter value commands, stop display time end commands, prize ball content commands, model commands, opening specification commands, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory display effect using the markers M1 and M2 (memory display effect execution means). The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed. Control the content of the production (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the sound drive circuit 134 the effect content (for example, during the variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, BGM during the jackpot effect, and winning a prize during the jackpot effect). Instruct the sound effect of time, voice data, etc.). As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of moving the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1 to the changing display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 is erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 89).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 26) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 26). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (reach other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and an effect according to the result. The control information of the content (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (effect execution means). ). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to that of the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round jackpot, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round large-duty effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) of this. .. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 89) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 89). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time, and stop. Determine the display mode and the like. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal fluctuation", "time-saving out-of-time fluctuation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, case of reach occurrence). Determines the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.).

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 91), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, if it corresponds to "one of the normal symbols", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. If it corresponds to "one of the probabilistic symbols", the process of selecting the effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes the coast mode rush effect or the fireworks rush rush effect according to the winning symbol. For example, if any of the probabilistic symbols are applicable, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered is executed, and if any of the normal symbols is applicable, the coast mode is entered. Execute the process of selecting the effect to be shown.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 91).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the main control device 70 stores the value of the launch position designation flag in the launch position designation command without changing the value, and transmits the launch position designation command to the effect control device 124. Compared with the conventional method of changing the value of the launch position designation flag and then storing it in the launch position designation command, the process of generating the launch position designation command can be simplified, and as a result, the main control device 70 The capacity can be reduced.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball should be launched in the right-handed area (second game area), a value for specifying the launch position designation lamp 38f in the launch position designation flag. (In order to set (20H), the value for specifying the launch position designation lamp 38f can be used as it is in the launch position designation command, and the control process is simplified by unifying the set values, and the capacity of the main control device 70 is increased. Can be reduced.

(3) According to the present embodiment, since the launch position designation command is transmitted when the power of the main control device 70 is turned on or when the value of the launch position designation flag changes, the minimum necessary launch position designation command is transmitted. As a result, the capacity of the main control device 70 can be reduced by simplifying the control process at the time of transmission.

The present invention can be implemented in various modifications without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having no probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol". However, the present invention can be applied.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called loop type (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the probability variation number), but an ST type (a substantial upper limit is set for the probability variation number) The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine of type).

Although the control device has been described with the example of the main control device 70, the control device may be the payout control device 92 or the effect control device 124. Further, although the gaming machine has been described with the example of a pachinko machine, it may be a slot machine.

The images given in the other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

Equipped with a control device that controls the game
The control device is
It is decided whether to launch the game ball in the first game area or the game ball in the second game area different from the first game area according to the progress of the game, and the decision content is set as the launch position designation flag. When the setting is made and it is determined that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, the control of the mode indicating that the game ball should be launched into the second game area is displayed as the launch position designation flag. The launch position designation flag setting means for setting a value depending on the hardware configuration for identifying the launch position designation display means performed by controlling the device, and the launch position designation flag setting means.
All the values set as the launch position designation flag are extracted, the contents of all the values are stored in the launch position designation information, and the launch position designation information is transmitted to a control device different from the control device. a firing position designation information transmission means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images